Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 440

CLK 320

CLK 500
CLK 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de- signed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen- We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest- of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 19 Getting started ................................... 29


Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 20 Unlocking ............................................. 30
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 22 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 30
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 24 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 32
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 25 Adjusting .............................................. 34
retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...................................... 25 Seats .............................................. 34
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Lower part ...................................... 26 Steering wheel................................ 37
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 27 Mirrors............................................ 38
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Door control panel................................ 28 Driving.................................................. 40
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Fastening the seat belts ................. 40
Operating your vehicle Starting the engine ......................... 43
outside the USA or Canada ............ 13 Switching on headlamps................. 47
Where to find it.................................... 14 Turn signals and high beam ............ 48
Symbols............................................... 15 Windshield wipers........................... 48
Operating safety .................................. 16 Problems while driving.................... 50
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Parking and locking.............................. 51
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Parking brake ................................. 52
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Switching off headlamps................. 53
Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Turning off the engine..................... 53
Contents

Memory function ............................... 116


Safety and Security ........................... 57 Controls in detail ............................... 85 Storing positions into memory ..... 117
Occupant safety................................... 58 Locking and unlocking ......................... 86 Recalling positions from memory. 117
Airbags ........................................... 59 SmartKeys...................................... 86 Storing exterior rear view
Seat belts ....................................... 64 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ........ 89 mirror parking position ................ 118
Children in the vehicle.................... 68 Opening the doors Lighting ............................................. 119
Blocking of rear side from the inside ............................... 95 Exterior lamp switch .................... 119
window operation........................... 74 Opening the trunk .......................... 96 Combination switch ..................... 123
Panic alarm .......................................... 75 Closing the trunk............................ 97 Hazard warning flasher ................ 123
Activating ....................................... 75 Trunk lid Interior lighting ............................ 124
Deactivating ................................... 75 opening/closing system* .............. 98 Door entry lamps ......................... 125
Driving safety systems......................... 76 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 103 Instrument cluster ............................. 126
ABS ................................................ 76 Separately locking the trunk ........ 104 Instrument cluster illumination .... 126
BAS ................................................ 77 Separately unlocking the trunk .... 105 Coolant temperature indicator..... 127
ESP................................................. 78 Automatic central locking ............ 105 Trip odometer .............................. 127
Anti-theft systems................................ 81 Locking and unlocking Tachometer.................................. 128
Immobilizer..................................... 81 from the inside ............................. 106 Outside temperature indicator ..... 128
Anti-theft alarm system .................. 82 Seats ................................................. 107
Tow-away alarm ............................. 83 Easy-entry/exit feature ................ 107
Removing and installing
front seat head restraints............. 108
Rear seats head restraints ........... 109
Multicontour seat*....................... 112
Seat ventilation* .......................... 113
Seat heating*............................... 114
Contents

Control system .................................. 129 Good visibility ..................................... 166 Audio system...................................... 183
Multifunction display.................... 129 Windshield wipers......................... 166 Audio and telephone, operation.... 183
Multifunction steering wheel........ 130 Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 166 Operating safety ........................... 183
Menus .......................................... 132 Rear view mirror ........................... 167 Operating and display elements ... 184
Standard display menu ................ 134 Sun visors ..................................... 169 Button and soft key operation ...... 186
AUDIO menu ................................ 134 Rear window sunshade* ............... 170 Operation...................................... 186
NAV menu.................................... 137 Rear window defroster.................. 171 Radio operation ............................ 189
Distronic* menu........................... 137 Automatic climate control .................. 172 Satellite radio (SAT)* (USA only)... 192
Malfunction memory menu .......... 138 Setting the temperature................ 175 Cassette operation ....................... 196
Settings menu.............................. 139 Adjusting air distribution............... 176 CD changer* operation................. 199
Trip computer menu..................... 152 Adjusting air volume ..................... 177 Telephone* operation ................... 203
TEL menu* ................................... 154 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 177 Power windows .................................. 210
Automatic transmission..................... 157 Defrosting ..................................... 177 Opening and
One-touch gearshifting................. 158 Air recirculation mode .................. 178 closing the windows ..................... 210
Gear ranges ................................. 159 Charcoal filter ............................... 179 Synchronizing power windows...... 213
Gear selector lever position ......... 160 Deactivating the Sliding/pop-up roof*.......................... 214
Steering wheel gearshift control climate control system ................. 180 Opening and closing
(Speedshift) CLK 55 AMG ............ 161 Air conditioning............................. 181 the sliding/pop-up roof ................ 214
Program mode selector switch..... 163 Residual heat and ventilation*...... 181 Synchronizing the
Accelerator position..................... 163 Rear passenger compartment sliding/pop-up roof...................... 217
Manual shift program adjustable air vents....................... 182 Driving systems.................................. 218
CLK 55 AMG ................................ 164 Cruise control ............................... 218
Emergency operation Distronic* ..................................... 221
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 165 Parktronic (Parking assist)* .......... 233
Contents

Loading .............................................. 237 At the gas station .............................. 278


Roof rack...................................... 237 Operation ......................................... 265 Refueling...................................... 278
Ski sack*...................................... 237 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)......... 266 Check regularly and
Split rear bench seat .................... 240 Driving instructions............................ 267 before a long trip ......................... 280
Loading instructions..................... 242 Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 267 Engine compartment ......................... 281
Cargo tie-down rings .................... 243 Drinking and driving ..................... 267 Hood ............................................ 281
Useful features .................................. 244 Pedals .......................................... 267 Engine oil ..................................... 283
Interior storage spaces ................ 244 Power assistance ......................... 267 Transmission fluid level................ 286
Ashtrays ....................................... 247 Brakes.......................................... 268 Coolant ........................................ 286
Cigarette lighter ........................... 248 Driving off .................................... 269 Battery ......................................... 288
Floormats* ................................... 249 Parking......................................... 269 Windshield washer system and
Telephone*................................... 250 Tires ............................................. 270 headlamp cleaning system*......... 289
Tele Aid ........................................ 251 Hydroplaning................................ 271 Tires and wheels................................ 290
Garage door opener ..................... 259 Tire traction.................................. 271 Important guidelines .................... 291
Tire speed rating .......................... 272 Life of tires................................... 291
Winter driving instructions ........... 273 Direction of rotation..................... 291
Standing water............................. 274 Checking tire inflation pressure ... 292
Passenger compartment .............. 274 Rotating wheels ........................... 293
Driving abroad.............................. 274 Winter driving .................................... 294
Control and operation Winter tires .................................. 294
of radio transmitters .................... 275 Block heater*............................... 295
Catalytic converter....................... 275 Snow chains................................. 295
Emission control .......................... 276
Coolant temperature.................... 277
Contents

Maintenance...................................... 296 Replacing bulbs .................................. 350


Clearing the service indicator ...... 296 Practical hints .................................. 305 Bulbs............................................. 350
Service term exceeded ................ 296 What to do if …? ................................. 306 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 352
Calling up the service indicator.... 297 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 306 Side marker lamp bulb.................. 355
Resetting the service indicator..... 297 Lamp in center console................. 313 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 356
Vehicle care....................................... 298 Messages in the display................ 314 Replacing wiper blades ...................... 357
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 298 Where will I find...? ............................. 337 Removing wiper blades................. 357
First aid kit.................................... 337 Installing wiper blades .................. 357
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 337 Flat tire............................................... 358
Minispare wheel............................ 340 Preparing the vehicle .................... 358
Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 343 Mounting the Minispare wheel...... 358
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 343 Battery ............................................... 363
Locking the vehicle ....................... 344 Disconnecting the battery ............ 364
Changing batteries in Removing the battery ................... 364
the SmartKey/ SmartKey Charging and reinstalling battery.. 364
with KEYLESS-GO* ....................... 345 Reconnecting the battery ............. 365
Fuel filler flap ................................ 347 Jump starting...................................... 366
Manually unlocking Towing the vehicle.............................. 368
the gear selector lever .................. 347 Towing the vehicle ........................ 368
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 348 Installing towing eye bolt .............. 370
Sliding/pop-up roof* .................... 348 Fuses.................................................. 372
Fuse box in
passenger compartment............... 372
Fuse box in engine compartment . 373
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk ............ 374
Contents

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 388


Technical data.................................. 375 Capacities .................................... 388 Technical terms............................... 397
Spare parts service ............................ 376 Engine oils.................................... 390
Warranty coverage............................. 377 Engine oil additives ...................... 390
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 390 Index................................................. 403
Information Booklet...................... 377 Brake fluid.................................... 390
Identification labels............................ 378 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 391
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 379 Fuel requirements ........................ 391
CLK 320/CLK 500/CLK 55 AMG. 379 Gasoline additives ........................ 391
Engine................................................ 380 Coolants....................................... 392
Rims and tires.................................... 381 Windshield washer system and
Same size tires ............................. 382 headlamp cleaning system*......... 394
Mixed size tires ............................ 383 Consumer information ....................... 395
Minispare wheel ........................... 384 Uniform tire quality grading ......... 395
Electrical system................................ 385
Main dimensions................................ 386
Weights.............................................. 387
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories ap-
held responsible for them, even if in indi- proved by us are available at your autho-
We recommend using genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies receive comprehensive information, also
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- on permissible technical modifications,
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, and where proper installation will be per-
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. formed.
their reliability, safety and special suitabili- Please do not use them.
ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
왔 Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Car Limited Warranty,
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty,
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty,
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only),
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws).
the operation of any equipment, your au- care and operating procedures.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be The Operator’s Manual and Service Book-
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- let are important documents and should be
dures. kept with the vehicle.

10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days. Written notification
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Assistance Center, One Mercedes
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:

11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

The Service Booklet describes all the nec- The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
essary maintenance work which should be Program provides factory trained technical send in the “Change of Address Notice”
performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Service Booklet with you
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
when you take the vehicle to your autho- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Center (in the USA) at
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
The service advisor will record each ser-
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus- vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
vice in the booklet for you.
tomer Assistance Representatives your own interest that we can contact you
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
gram Brochure in your glove box. able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
eign countries, please be aware that: write to:
앫 service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5

13
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color so you can find about the equipment installed in your vehi- cle can be found in this section.
information quickly. cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
At a glance with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the you.
driver’s seat. The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
Operation and easily.
Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
need for your first drive. You should read cle. 앫 this Operator’s Manual
this section first if this is your first
앫 the Service Booklet
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle. Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features in your vehicle.

14
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
The following symbols are found in this 왘 This symbol points to instructions for
Operator’s Manual: Warning! G you to follow.
* Optional equipment is identified 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
with an asterisk. Since standard ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step
equipment varies between models, or the health or life of others. procedure.
the descriptions and illustrations in
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
! look for further information on a
the actual equipment of your
topic.
vehicle. Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
i
page.
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to in-
dicate cross-reference to term
definitions.
Display Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.

15
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage to and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road.
components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair fa- to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the cility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.

16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5

17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.

18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel

19
At a glance
Cockpit
왔 Cockpit

20
At a glance
Cockpit

Item Page Item Page


1 Headlamp washer switch* 166 8 Front Parktronic* warning 235
2 Combination switch indicator
9 Overhead control panel 27
앫 Turn signals 48
a Glove box 244
앫 Windshield wipers 48
b Center console 25, 26
앫 High beam 48
c Hood lock release 281
3 Cruise control lever
d Horn
앫 Cruise control 218
e Steering wheel adjustment 38
앫 Distronic* 221 stalk
4 Multifunction steering 24, f Parking brake pedal 46
wheel 130
g Door control panel 28
5 Instrument cluster 22,
h Parking brake release 46
126
j Exterior lamp switch 47,
6 Lever for voice control
119
system*, see separate op-
erating instructions k Exterior rear view mirror 39
7 Starter switch 31 adjustment

21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster

22
At a glance
Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 L Left turn signal indi- 48 6 K Right turn signal indi- 48 a Clock with: 144
cator lamp cator lamp ; Brake warning lamp, 307
2 v ESP warning lamp 310 7 Coolant temperature indi- 127 except Canada
3 Speedometer cator with: 3 Brake warning lamp,
4 Multifunction display 129 Ï Coolant temperature 309, Canada only
with: warning lamp 323 ? Engine malfunction 308
Basic display with outside 134, 8 Tachometer with: 128 indicator lamp
temperature display 144 1 Supplemental 312, b Fuel display with:
Status indicator with mal- 134, restraint system 334 W Fuel reserve warning 311
function warning message 138 indicator lamp lamp
Trip odometer 127 - Antilock Brake Sys- 306 c Reset button for:
tem (ABS) warning
5 l Distance warning 310 lamp 앫 Resetting trip odometer 127
lamp 앫
< Seat belt non-usage 311, Adjusting instrument 126
Vehicles without Distronic*: warning lamp 333 cluster illumination
Warning lamp without func- 앫
tion. It illuminates with the
A High beam headlamp 123 Confirming new time set- 144
indicator tings
ignition on. It should go out
when the engine is running. 9 Main odometer with:
앫 Gear selector lever posi- 160
tion
앫 Program mode 163

23
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
왔 Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page Item Page
1 Multifunction display 129 4 Menu systems: Press
Operating control sys- 130 button
tem è for next system
2 Selecting the submenu or ÿ for previous system
setting the volume 5 Moving within a menu:
ç down / to decrease Press button
æ up / to increase j for next display
3 Telephone*: Press button k for previous display
í to take a call 155
to dial a call 155
ì to end a call 155
to reject an incom-
ing call

24
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Seat heater*, driver’s side 114 8 Tow-away alarm switch 83
Seat ventilation*, driver’s
Anti-theft alarm system in- 84
side
dicator lamp
2 Parking assist* (Parktronic 236
9 Seat heater*, passenger 114
system*) deactivation
side
switch
Seat ventilation*,
3 Rear window sunshade* 170 passenger side
4 ESP control switch 78 a PASS. AIRBAG OFF 70,
5 Hazard warning flasher 123 indicator lamp 313
on/off switch b Audio system or 134
6 Central locking switch 106 COMAND* (see separate
operating instructions)
7 Rear head restraints, fold- 110
ing down switch c Automatic climate control 172,
Rear window defroster 171
d Ashtray 247

25
At a glance
Center console

Lower part Item Page Item Page


1 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 33 5 Program mode selector for 163,
button automatic transmission 164
2 Storage compartment 246 6 Gear selector lever for 157
3 Thumbwheel for setting 228 automatic transmission
distance in Distronic*
4 Distance warning func- 229
tion* on/off switch

26
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Tele Aid (emergency call 251 7 Hands-free microphone for 250
system) button Tele Aid (emergency call
2 Rear interior lighting 125 system), telephone* and
on/off voice control system* (see
separate operating instruc-
3 Temperature sensor for au- 172 tions)
tomatic climate control
8 Rear view mirror 38,
4 Sliding/pop-up roof* 214 167
5 Right reading lamp on/off 125 9 Garage door opener 259
6 Interior lighting control 124 a Left reading lamp on/off 125

27
At a glance
Door control panel
왔 Door control panel
Item Page
1 Door handle 95
2 Seat adjustment 35,
107
3 Memory function (for stor- 116
ing seat, exterior mirror
and steering wheel set-
tings)
4 Switches for opening/clos- 212
ing front door windows
5 Rear window override 74
switch
6 Switches for opening/clos- 212
ing rear windows
7 Remote trunk lid release 97
switch
Trunk lid opening/closing 98
system switch*

28
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking

29
Getting started
Unlocking
왔 Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey 왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func- SmartKey.
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
should pay special attention to the infor-
locking knobs in the doors move up.
mation given here.
왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the
If you are already familiar with the basic
SmartKey in the starter switch.
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further i
information. The corresponding page refer- Opening a door causes the windows on
ences are located at the end of each seg- that side of the car to open slightly.
ment. They will return to the up position when
SmartKey with remote control the door is closed.
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk lid For more information, see “Locking and
3 Œ Unlock button unlocking” (컄 page 86).
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 75)

30
Getting started
Unlocking

Starter switch positions !


Warning! G If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the battery may not be
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
sufficiently charged.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and 왘 Check the battery and charge it
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- if necessary (컄 page 363).
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 366).
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident To prevent accelerated battery dis-
and/or serious personal injury. charge and a possible dead battery, al-
ways remove the SmartKey from the
Starter switch
starter switch when the engine is not in
0 For removing SmartKey i operation.
1 Power supply to some electrical con- The SmartKey can only be removed
sumers, such as seat adjustment from the starter switch with the gear
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical selector lever in position P.
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position

31
Getting started
Unlocking

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i


To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
Warning! G
If you have the KEYLESS-GO function, your
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
vehicle checks whether the SmartKey with When leaving the vehicle, always take the
vehicle, no further than approx. 3 feet
KEYLESS-GO is valid when you pull the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
(1 meter) away from the door.
door handle. If your SmartKey is valid, the lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
doors will unlock, and you can open them. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
왘 Pull the door handle. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
The turn signal lamps flash once. The cle equipment may cause an accident
KEYLESS-GO function.
locking knobs on the doors move up. and/or serious personal injury.

If the SmartKey is inside the vehicle, press-


ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on
the gear selector lever corresponds to
turning the SmartKey to the various starter
switch positions.

32
Getting started
Unlocking

왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set Ignition (or position 2)
to P.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
왘 Do not depress the brake pedal. ton twice.
This supplies power to all electrical
Position 1
consumers. All the lamps in the instru-
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- ment cluster come on.
ton once.
i
This supplies power to some electrical
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button start/stop button once, the power sup-
i ply is again switched off.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle. If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button More information can be found in the
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 89).
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board 앫 once again, the ignition (position 2) For information on starting the engine us-
electronics have status 0 (as with is switched on. ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
SmartKey removed). 앫 twice, the power supply is again see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
switched off. (컄 page 44).

33
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting

Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can


correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 40).
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Never place hands under the seat or near Children 12 years old and under must never
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- any moving parts while a seat is being ride in the front seat, except in a
tening of seat belts, must be done before adjusted. Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
the vehicle is put into motion. compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
Seats Warning! G hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
Warning! G SmartKey from the starter switch, take the flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and fatal injury will result.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. lock your vehicle.
According to accident statistics, children
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause The power seats can also be operated with are safer when properly restrained in the
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not rear seating positions than in the front seat-
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat leave children unattended in the vehicle, or ing positions. Infants and small children
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively re- with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- must ride in back seats and be seated in an
clined position can be dangerous. You could pervised use of vehicle equipment may appropriate infant or child restraint system,
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you cause an accident and/or serious personal which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
slide under it, the belt would apply force at injury. seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
rious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat accordance with the child seat manufactur-
belts provide the best restraint when the er's instructions.
wearer is in an upright position and belts are 1
BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens
properly positioned on the body. Automotive Corp.

34
Getting started
Adjusting

왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch Seat fore and aft adjustment
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
to position 1 or 2 (컄 page 31).
significantly increased if the child restraints 왘 Press the switch forward or backward
are not properly secured in the vehicle and or in the direction of arrow 4.
the child is not properly secured in the child
왘 Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
restraint.
button once or twice (컄 page 33). position that still allows you to reach
or the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
Seat adjustment The position should be as far to the rear
왘 Open the driver’s or passenger door. as possible, consistent with ability to
The seat adjustment switches are located
in each door. properly operate controls.

i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or be-
hind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
The memory function (컄 page 116) lets
you store the setting for the seat posi-
tion together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
1 Head restraint height view mirrors.
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment
5 Backrest tilt

35
Getting started
Adjusting

Seat cushion tilt Head restraint height Head restraint tilt


왘 Press the switch up or down in the di- 왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 3 until your upper rection of arrow 1.
legs are lightly supported.

Seat backrest tilt


Warning! G
왘 Press the switch forward or backward For your protection, drive only with properly
in the direction of arrow 5 until your positioned head restraints.
arms are slightly angled when holding Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the steering wheel. the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten- Manually adjust the angle of the head re-
Seat height tial for injury to the head and neck in the straint.
왘 Press the switch up or down in the di- event of an accident or similar situation. 왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the
rection of arrow 2. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraint cushion.
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
For more information, see “Seats”
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
(컄 page 107).
dent.

36
Getting started
Adjusting

Folding front seat backrests forward Folding backrests forward Steering wheel
왘 Pull release lever 1 forward and fold
the backrest forward.
Warning! G
The head restraint will automatically
move down. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
Folding backrests back ing could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
왘 Fold and press the backrest rearward
until it engages in driving position. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
The head restraint returns to its previ-
1 Release lever SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
ous position.
lock your vehicle.
i For more information, see “Easy-entry/ex- The steering wheel adjustment feature can
In addition to the front seat backrests, it feature” (컄 page 107). also be operated with the driver’s door
the front seat cushions can also be
open. Do not leave children unattended in
shifted forward to permit easy access
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
to the rear whenever the seat is located
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
in the rear half of its adjustment range.
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
Swivel backrest forward by pulling the
personal injury.
release lever until the seat moves in a
combined forward and upward move-
ment.

37
Getting started
Adjusting

Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column in or out Mirrors


The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is 왘 Move stalk forward or back in the direc-
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
located on the steering column (lower left). tion of arrow 1 until a comfortable
mirrors before driving so that you have a
steering wheel position is reached with
good view of the road and traffic condi-
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
tions.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘 Move stalk up or down in the direction
Warning! G
of arrow 2. In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
Make sure your legs can move freely may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
and all the displays (incl. malfunction glass breaks.
and indicator lamps) on the instrument Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out cluster are clearly visible. low the liquid to come into contact with
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
i
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch In case it does, immediately flush affected
The memory function (컄 page 116) lets
to position 1 or 2 (컄 page 31). area with water, and seek medical help if
you store the setting for the steering
necessary.
or wheel together with the setting for the
seat position and exterior rear view
왘 Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop Interior rear view mirror
mirrors.
button once or twice (컄 page 33).
왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
or mirror.
왘 Open the driver’s door. For more information, see “Rear view mir-
ror” (컄 page 167)

38
Getting started
Adjusting

Exterior rear view mirror !


If an exterior rear view mirror was forc-
Warning! G ibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from
Exercise care when using the passenger the front), reposition it by applying firm
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror pressure until it snaps into place. The
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface mirror housing is now properly posi-
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror tioned and you can adjust the mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in- normally.
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes. 1 Adjustment button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
i
ror button The memory function (컄 page 116) lets
! 3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror you store the setting for the exterior
Electrolyte drops coming into contact button rear view mirrors together with the set-
with the vehicle paint finish can only be tings for the steering wheel and seat
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. position.
completely removed while in their liq-
uid state and by applying plenty of wa- All the lamps in the instrument cluster
ter come on. i
왘 Press button 3 for the left mirror or At low ambient temperatures, the mir-
The buttons are located above the exterior button 2 for the right mirror. rors will be heated automatically.
lamp switch.
왘 Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
left or right according to the desired For more information, see “Activating exte-
setting. rior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 168).

39
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Fastening the seat belts
Warning! G In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot- Warning! G seat belt. The airbags can only protect as ex-
pected if the occupants are using their seat
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear- belts (컄 page 58).
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
ance for the pedals. off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
During sudden driving or braking maneu-
rear and pregnant women. Warning! G
vers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- Children 12 years old and under must never
or accelerate. sition your seat belt greatly increases your ride in the front seat, except in a
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
accident. You and your passengers should compatible child seat, which operates with
always wear seat belts. the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
can be considerably more severe without bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
your seat belt properly buckled. Without they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
your seat belt buckled, you are much more flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be fatal injury will result.
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured 1
BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens
or killed. Automotive Corp.

40
Getting started
Driving

The seat belt presenter for driver and pas-


According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
Warning! G senger makes it easier to put on the seat
belt.
rear seating positions than in the front seat- Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
ing positions. Infants and small children backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
must ride in back seats and be seated in an reclined position can be dangerous. You
appropriate infant or child restraint system, could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
which is properly secured with the vehicle's If you slide under it, the belt would apply
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via force at the abdomen or neck. This could
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
accordance with the child seat manufactur- backrest and seat belt provide the best re-
er's instructions. straint when the wearer is in an upright po-
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is sition and the belt is properly positioned on
significantly increased if the child restraints the body. 1 Seat belt presenter
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child The seat belt presenter slides out when the
restraint. Warning! G corresponding door is closed and the
SmartKey in the starter switch or
Read and observe the additional warning no- KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button are in
Warning! G tices printed in the “Safety and Security” position 1 or 2.
section (컄 page 62).
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt.

41
Getting started
Driving

왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt out 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
of the seat belt presenter. on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
왘 Place the belt over your shoulder.
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
왘 Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until
right position.
it clicks.
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion person at a time.
up. 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
son and another object at the same
Proper use of seat belts time.
앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening. 앫 Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.
앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible 앫 Ensure that the seat belt is always fit-
1 Latch plate to the middle of the shoulder (it should ted snugly. You should avoid wearing
2 Release button not touch the neck or pass under the bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
3 Buckle arm). when traveling in the vehicle.

42
Getting started
Driving

The seat belt presenter slides back: Starting the engine


Warning! G 앫 right after you pushed the latch
plate 1 into buckle 3 and heard it
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
click.
Warning! G
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the 앫 after approximately 30 seconds if you Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. did not push latch plate 1 into your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
This could damage the belt. buckle 3. monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Never attempt to make modifications to 앫 if your door is opened.
seat belts. This could impair the effective- Do not run the engine in confined areas
앫 if you turn the SmartKey in the starter
ness of the belts. (such as a garage) which are not properly
switch to position 0.
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly 앫 if you release a front seat backrest and fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
stressed in an accident must be replaced. fold it forward. have the cause determined and corrected
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
immediately. If you must drive under these
ter.
Warning! G conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open.
The seat belt presenter must be retracted
while the vehicle is in motion. Only when the
seat belt presenter is retracted can the seat
belt be properly positioned on the body and
protect the occupant as intended.

43
Getting started
Driving

Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey Starting with KEYLESS-GO*


왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set You can start your vehicle without the
to P. SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
왘 Do not depress accelerator
gear selector lever.
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 (컄 page 31) and release it The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
again immediately (“touch-start”). located in the vehicle.

The engine then starts automatically.


왘 Depress the brake pedal.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission The gear selector lever lock is released.
P Park position with gear selector lever For information on turning off the engine
lock with the SmartKey, see (컄 page 53).
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 157).

44
Getting started
Driving

왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set Starting difficulties 왘 Repeat the starting procedure
to P. (컄 page 43). Remember that extended
If the engine does not start as described,
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘 Do not depress accelerator carry out the following steps:
왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 366).
왘 Depress the brake pedal during the 왘 If you are starting the engine with the
starting procedure. SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter If the engine does not start after several
The gear selector lever lock is released. switch to position 0 and repeat starting starting attempts, there could be a mal-
procedure. function in the engine electronics or in the
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop fuel supply system.
왘 If you are starting the engine with
button 1 once.
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The engine starts automatically if the may be open to allow for better detec- Center.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the tion of the SmartKey with
vehicle. KEYLESS-GO*.
For information on turning off the engine Or:
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off the en- Start the engine with the SmartKey as
gine with KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 54). radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.

45
Getting started
Driving

Parking brake i
Warning! G You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open doors only when condi-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
tions are safe to do so.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and You can deactivate the automatic lock-
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- ing using the control system
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an (컄 page 149).
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake, which could result in an acci- !
dent and/or serious personal injury.
If you hear a warning signal when driv-
1 Parking brake pedal ing off, you have forgotten to release
2 Parking brake release handle Driving the parking brake.
왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on 왘 Depress the brake pedal. Release the parking brake.
handle 2. 왘 Move gear selector lever in
The indicator lamp ; (USA only) position D or R. After a cold start, the automatic transmis-
or 3 (Canada only) in the clock 왘 Release the brake pedal.
sion shifts at a higher engine revolution.
goes out. This allows the catalytic converter to reach
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator its operating temperature earlier.
pedal.
i
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat-
Wait for the gear selection process to
ic central locking system engages and the
complete before setting the vehicle in
locking knobs drop down.
motion.

46
Getting started
Driving

Switching on headlamps
Warning! G Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le- On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high- in order to obtain braking action. This could
er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You vent this type of loss of control.
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
!
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Place the gear selector lever in
position R only when the vehicle is Exterior lamp switch
stopped in order to avoid damaging the
! 1 Off
transmission.
2 Low beam headlamps on
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re- ! 왘 Turn the switch to B.
duces engine performance and causes For more information, see “Exterior lamp
Do not run cold engine at high engine
premature brake and drivetrain wear. switch” (컄 page 119).
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
life of the engine.

47
Getting started
Driving

Turn signals and high beam High beam Windshield wipers


왘 Push the combination switch forward.
The combination switch is located on the The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column. The high beam headlights are switched left of the steering column.
on.
The high beam symbol A in the
tachometer comes on.
For more information, see “High beam
flasher” (컄 page 123).

Combination switch Combination switch


1 Turn signals, right 1 Single wipe
2 Turn signals, left 2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘 Press the combination switch up 1 or 왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on.
down 2.

i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal flashes three times.

48
Getting started
Driving

Switching on windshield wipers ! Wiping with windshield washer fluid


왘 Turn the combination switch to the de- Do not leave windshield wipers in inter- 왘 Push combination switch in the direc-
sired position depending on the inten- mittent setting when the vehicle is tak- tion of arrow 1 past the resistance
sity of the rain. en to an automatic car wash or during point.
windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper-
0 Windshield wipers off The windshield wipers operate with
ate in the presence of water sprayed on
I Intermittent wiping washer fluid.
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result. For information on filling up the washer
II Normal wiper speed
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
III Fast wiper speed The switch should not be left in inter-
and headlamp cleaning system*”
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
(컄 page 289).
i the windshield once every time the en-
The intermittent wiping interval is de- gine is started. Dust that accumulates !
pendent on wetness of windshield. on the windshield might scratch the
If anything blocks the windshield wip-
Wiping will not occur with a door open. glass and/or damage the wiper blades
ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
when wiping occurs on a dry wind-
immediately.
shield.
앫 For safety reasons,
Single wipe 앫 turn off the engine by turning
왘 Press combination switch briefly in the the SmartKey to position 0 and
direction of arrow 1. withdraw SmartKey from starter
switch
The windshield wipers wipe one time
or 컄컄
without washer fluid.

49
Getting started
Driving

컄컄 앫 turn off the engine by pressing Problems while driving In case of accident
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
button and open the driver’s The engine runs erratically and misfires 왘 Do not start the engine under any cir-
door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is in posi- 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged. cumstances.
tion 0, same as with SmartKey 앫 The engine electronics may not be op- 왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
removed from starter switch) erating properly. ties.
before attempting to remove any 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
blockage. the catalytic converter and damaged it. termined:
앫 Remove blockage. 왘 Give very little gas. 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 Turn the windshield wipers on Center.
왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
again. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as If no damage can be determined on the
If windshield wipers fail to function at soon as possible. 앫 major assemblies
all in switch position I,
The coolant temperature is over 248°F 앫 fuel system
앫 set the combination switch to the (120°C) 앫 engine mount
next highest wiper speed
The coolant is too hot and is no longer 왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
앫 have the windshield wipers cooling the engine.
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
ant if necessary (컄 page 286).

50
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G 앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
your vehicle. End your drive as follows: start/stop button (vehicles with
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
KEYLESS-GO*).
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re- leaving.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
moving the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
the SmartKey is removed. sult of inadvertent vehicle movement, be-
fore turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle always:
Warning! G 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
With the engine not running, there is no
앫 Move the gear selector lever to
power assistance for the brake and steering
position P.
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of 앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
hicle. wheel towards the road curb.

51
Getting started
Parking and locking

Parking brake
Warning! G Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se-
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the objects.
parking brake and/or move the gear selec- Always set the parking brake in addition to
tor lever from position P, either of which shifting to position P (컄 page 159).
could result in an accident and/or serious
1 Parking brake personal injury. When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
2 Release handle towards the road curb.

왘 Step firmly on parking brake 1.


When the engine is running, the indica-
tor lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the instru-
ment cluster will be illuminated.

52
Getting started
Parking and locking

Switching off headlamps Turning off the engine Turning off the engine with the
SmartKey
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M 왘 Place the gear selector lever in
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
(컄 page 47). position P.
(컄 page 31) to position 0 and remove
For more information, see “Lighting” i it.
(컄 page 119). The immobilizer is activated.
Always set the parking brake in addi-
tion to shifting to position P. i
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels The SmartKey can only be removed
towards the curb. from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.

왘 Press the seat belt release button


(컄 page 42).
Allow the retractor to completely re-
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.

!
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off. 컄컄

53
Getting started
Parking and locking

컄컄 i 왘 After exiting the vehicle, press the lock Turning off the engine with
Opening a door causes the windows on button ‹ on the SmartKey KEYLESS-GO*
that side of the car to open slightly. (컄 page 30).
왘 Place the gear selector lever in P.
They will return to the up position when All turn signal lamps flash three times.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
the door is closed. The locking knobs in the doors move
ton to shut off the engine.
down.
With the driver's door closed, the start-
Warning! G Warning! G
er switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
To prevent possible personal injury, always is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
keep hands and fingers away from the door removed from starter switch
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- (컄 page 31).
your vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
cially careful when small children are
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an 왘 Press the seat belt release button
around.
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- (컄 page 42).
Before closing doors, make sure there is no cle may cause an accident and/or serious Allow the retractor to completely re-
possibility of someone getting caught in a personal injury. wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
door during closing.
plate.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 86).

54
Getting started
Parking and locking

! i
If you hear a warning signal you have Opening a door causes the windows on
Warning! G
either that side of the car to open slightly.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
앫 forgotten to switch off the vehi- They will return to the up position when
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
cles’s exterior lamps before open- the door is closed.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
ing the driver’s door, or lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
앫 tried to turn off the engine while the attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
gear selector lever is not in P. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
Turn off the lights or place the gear se- and/or serious personal injury.
lector lever in P.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 86).
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door 1 Lock button on the door handle
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock
cially careful when small children are
button 1 on the door handle or on the
around.
trunk lid.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a All turn signal lamps flash three times.
door during closing. The locking knobs in the doors move
down.

55
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems

57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왔 Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly
portant facts about the restraint systems cluster comes on: after you start the engine. This shows that
of the vehicle. the restraint systems are operational.
앫 for about 4 seconds when you turn the
The restraint systems are SmartKey in the starter switch to A malfunction in the system has been de-
position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO* tected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫 Seat belts
start/stop button once.
앫 fails to extinguish after approximately
앫 Emergency tensioning device
앫 for about 4 seconds when you start the 4 seconds.
앫 Airbags engine by turning the SmartKey or 앫 does not come on at all.
앫 Child seats pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button. 앫 comes on after the engine was started
앫 Child seat recognition or while driving.
앫 Lower anchors and tethers for children i For safety reasons, we strongly recom-
(LATCH) The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if mend that you visit an authorized
the SmartKey is turned to position 2 Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
As independent systems, their protective and left there or if the KEYLESS-GO*
effects work in conjunction with each oth- have the system checked.
start/stop button is pressed twice. The
er. 1 indicator lamp will go out when More information can be found in the
you start the engine. “Practical hints” section (컄 page 312).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 68).

58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Airbags
Warning! G Warning! G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
comes on during driving or does not come at airbags inflate, it is very important for the
all, the SRS may not be operational. For your Airbags are designed to reduce the potential driver and front passenger to always be in a
safety, we strongly recommend that you vis- for injury resulting from certain frontal im- properly seated position and to be wearing
it an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center im- pacts (front airbags) or side impacts (side seat belts.
mediately to have the system checked; impact airbags and head protection window For maximum protection in the event of a
otherwise the SRS may not be activated curtain airbags) which may cause significant collision always be in normal seated position
when needed in an accident, which could re- injuries. However, no system available today with your back against the backrest. Fasten
sult in serious or fatal injury, or it might de- can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities. your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
ploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which positioned on your body.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releas-
could also result in injury.
es a small amount of dust from the airbags. Since the airbag inflates with considerable
Improper work on the restraint systems, in- This dust, however, is neither injurious to speed and force, a proper seating and hands
cluding incorrect installation and removal, your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the on steering wheel position will help to keep
can lead to possible injury through an unin- vehicle. The dust might cause some tempo- you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc-
tended activation of the SRS. rary breathing difficulty for people with asth- cupants who are unbelted, out of position or
In addition, through improper work there is ma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, too close to the airbag can be seriously in-
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or you may wish to get out of the vehicle as jured by an airbag as it inflates with great
causing unintended airbag deployment. soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any force in the blink of an eye:
Work on the SRS must therefore only be per- breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
앫 Sit properly belted in an upright position
formed by qualified technicians. Contact vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
with your back against the seat back-
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. fresh air by opening a window or door.
rest. 컄컄

59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

컄컄
앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
inflates. This could result in serious inju-
ries or death should the airbag be trig-
Warning! G
tion of vehicle controls. The distance gered. Always sit upright, properly use Accident research shows that the safest
from the center of the driver’s breast- the seat belts and appropriate size in-
bone to the center of the airbag cover on place for children in an automobile is in the
fant or child restraint system. rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be 앫 Children 12 years old and under must 12 years old or under in the passenger front
able to accomplish this by a combina- never ride in the front seat, except in a seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
tion of adjustments to the seat and Mercedes-Benz authorized a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
steering wheel. If you have any prob- BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, turn off the passenger front airbag.
lems, please see your authorized which operates with the BabySmartTM BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
Mercedes-Benz Center. system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
side impact airbag.
vate the passenger front airbag when it
앫 Do not lean with your head or chest
is properly installed. Otherwise they will It should be noted that with respect to both
close to the steering wheel or dash-
be struck by the airbag when it inflates front and rear side impact airbags there is a
board.
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa- possibility for a side airbag related injury if
앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering tal injury will result. occupants, especially children, are not prop-
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- erly seated or restrained when next to a side
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
side the rim can increase the risk and
sult in severe injuries to you or other occu- airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
potential severity of hand/arm injury
pants. side impact in order to do its job.
when driver front airbag inflates.
앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as If you sell your vehicle you are responsible To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
possible rearward from the dashboard to make the buyer aware of these points. Be follow these guidelines:
when the seat is occupied. sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manu- (1) Occupants, especially children, should
앫 Occupants, especially children, should al. never place their bodies or lean their
never lean their heads in the area of the 1 BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens heads in the area of the door or the side
door or the side where the side airbag Automotive Corp. where the side airbag inflates.

60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

This could result in serious injuries or i Your vehicle was originally equipped
death should the side airbag be activat- Airbags are designed to activate only in with airbags that are designed to acti-
ed. certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, vate in certain impacts exceeding a
or side (side impact and head protec- preset threshold to reduce the poten-
(2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat
tion window curtain airbags) impacts tial and severity of injury. It is important
belts and use an appropriately sized in-
which exceed preset thresholds. to your safety and that of your passen-
fant or child restraint system for all chil-
ger that you replace deployed airbags
dren 12 years old or under. Only during these types of impacts, if of
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
sufficient severity to meet the deploy-
(3) Always wear seat belts properly. to ensure that the vehicle will continue
ment thresholds, will they provide their
If you believe that, even with the use of to provide supplemental crash protec-
supplemental protection.
these guidelines, it would be safer for your tion for occupants.
rear seat occupants to have the rear mount- The driver and passenger should al-
ed side airbags deactivated, then deactiva- ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
tion can be accomplished upon your written is not possible for the airbags to pro-
request to do so at your authorized vide their supplemental protection.
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. In cases of other frontal impacts, an-
Please contact your local authorized gled impacts, roll-overs, other side im-
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer pacts, rear collisions, or other
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes accidents, the airbags will not be acti-
(1-800-367-6372) for details. vated. The driver and passengers will
then be protected by the fastened seat
belts.
We caution you not to rely on the pres-
ence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.

61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt,


trim panels, and installation of addition- 앫 In addition, through improper work
emergency tensioning device and there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop-
al electrical/electronic equipment on or
airbag erative or causing unintended airbag de-
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between airbags and occupants ployment. Work on the SRS must
Warning! G free from objects (e.g. packages, purs- therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact your authorized
es, umbrellas, etc.).
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were
앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
highly stressed in an accident must be 앫 For your protection and the protection
They could tear.
replaced and their anchoring points of others, when disposing of the airbag
must also be checked. Only use belts in- 앫 Do not make any modification that could unit or emergency tensioning device,
stalled or supplied by an authorized change the effectiveness of the belts. our safety instructions must be fol-
Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers lowed. These instructions are available
from the coat hooks or handles over the from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 Airbags and ETDs are designed to func-
door. These items may turn into projec- Center.
tion on a one-time-only basis. An airbag
or emergency tensioning device (ETD) tiles and cause head and other injuries 앫 Given the considerable deployment
that was activated must be replaced. when curtain airbag is deployed. speed and the textile structure of the
앫 An airbag system component within the airbags, there is the possibility of abra-
앫 No modifications of any kind may be
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag sions or other injuries resulting from air-
made to any components or wiring of
has inflated. Do not touch. bag deployment.
the SRS. This includes changing or re-
moving any component or part of the 앫 Improper work on the system, including
SRS, the installation of additional trim incorrect installation and removal, can When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
material, badges, etc. over the steering lead to possible injury through an unin- urge you to give notice to the subsequent
wheel hub, passenger front airbag cov- tended activation of the SRS. owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
er, door trim panels, or rear side alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.

62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Front airbags The airbags will not deploy in impacts !


which do not exceed the system’s deploy- Do not place objects heavier than 20
ment thresholds. You will then be protect- lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
ed by the fastened seat belts. This could cause the front or side im-
The passenger front airbag will only be de- pact airbag on the front passenger side
ployed if: to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold.
앫 the front passenger seat is occupied.
앫 the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
in the center console is not lit
(컄 page 70).
1 Driver airbag
앫 impact exceeds a preset deployment
2 Passenger airbag
threshold
Driver and passenger airbags are de-
ployed:
앫 in the event of a frontal impact
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫 independently of the side impact air-
bags

63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Side impact airbags, window curtain The side impact airbags 1 and 2 and the Seat belts
airbags window curtain airbags 3 are not de-
ployed in impacts which do not exceed the When the engine is started, the seat belt
system’s deployment threshold. non-usage warning lamp < illuminates
to remind you and your passengers to fas-
The front passenger side impact airbag 1
ten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt
will only deploy if the system senses that
is not fastened before the engine is start-
the front passenger seat is occupied.
ed, the seat belt non-usage warning lamp
The window curtain airbags 3 fill up the < illuminates and a warning chime
area between the A and C pillars (see ar- sounds for approximately six seconds
rows). when the engine is started.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
1 Front side impact airbags restraint systems is required by law in all
2 Rear side impact airbags 50 states, the District of Columbia, the
3 Window curtain airbag U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
The side impact airbags and window cur- Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
tain airbags are deployed: occupants should have their seat belts fas-
앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy- Information on fastening seat belts is
ment threshold found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 40).
앫 independently of the front airbags

64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

i
For information on infants and children
Warning! G Warning! G
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
straint systems for infants and chil-
off. Always make sure your passengers are backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
properly restrained, even those sitting in the reclined position can be dangerous. You
(컄 page 68).
rear and pregnant women. could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- If you slide under it, the belt would apply
sition your seat belt greatly increases your force at the abdomen or neck. This could
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
accident. You and your passengers should backrest and seat belt provide the best re-
always wear seat belts. straint when the wearer is in an upright po-
sition and the belt is properly positioned on
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries the body.
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
Warning! G
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
or killed.
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
death is lessened if you are properly wearing strained with a separate seat belt.
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.

65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G Warning! G 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your


arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a crash, your body would move
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
too far forward. That would increase the
stressed in an accident must be replaced 앫 Seat belts can only work when used chance of head and neck injuries. The
and their anchoring points must also be properly. Never wear seat belts in any belt would also apply too much force to
checked. other way than as described in this sec- the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
Only use seat belts which have been ap- tion, as that could result in serious inju- verely injure internal organs such as
proved by Mercedes-Benz. ries in case of an accident. your liver or spleen.
앫 Each occupant should wear their seat 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help objects in or on your clothing, such as
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
reduce the likelihood of and potential eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
or to failure. severity of injuries in accidents, includ- might cause injuries.
Have all work carried out only by qualified ing rollovers. The integrated restraint 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
technicians. Contact an authorized system includes SRS (driver airbag, pas- on your hips and not across the abdo-
Mercedes-Benz Center. senger front airbag, side impact airbags, men. If the belt is positioned across your
head protection window curtain airbags abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
for side windows), ETD (seat belt emer- in a crash.
gency tensioning device), and front seat
knee bolsters. The system is designed
to enhance the protection offered to
properly belted occupants in certain
frontal (front airbags) and side (side im-
pact and window curtain airbags) im-
pacts which exceed preset deployment
thresholds.

66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Emergency tensioning device (ETD),


앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat seat belt force limiter Warning! G
belt around a person and another per- The seat belts for the front and rear seats An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
son or other objects. are equipped with emergency tensioning was activated must be replaced.
앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a devices and belt force limiters.
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width When disposing of the emergency tension-
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol- ing device, our safety instructions must be
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could lowing cases when the seat belt are fas- followed. These are available at your autho-
cause injuries. tened and: rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 Pregnant women should also use a 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion exceeding a preset severity level !
should be positioned as low as possible
앫 if the restraint systems are operational Do not place objects heavier than 20
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
sure on the abdomen. and functioning correctly. See lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 58) This could cause the front or side im-
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
In an impact, emergency tensioning devic- pact airbag on the front passenger side
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat. es remove slack from the belts in such a to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
way that the seat belts fit more snugly system's deployment threshold.
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on oc- Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
cupants during a crash. An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.

67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Children in the vehicle Infant and child restraint systems To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
Only use a BabySmartTM1 compatible child
If an infant or child is traveling with you in belt can again be used in the usual man-
restraint for the front passenger seat in
the vehicle: ner.
this vehicle.
앫 Secure the child using an infant or child
We recommend all infants and children be i
restraint appropriate to the age and
properly restrained at all times while the Information on child seats with anchor
size of the child and recommended for
vehicle is in motion. fittings for tether anchorages
use by Mercedes-Benz.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s (컄 page 72).
앫 Ensure that the infant or child is prop-
seat belt have special seat belt retractors For information on LATCH-type child
erly secured by a belt at all times while
for secure fastening of child restraints. seat anchors (컄 page 73).
the vehicle is in motion.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child re-
Infant and child restraint seats and infor-
straint instructions for mounting. Then pull
mation on choosing an appropriate re-
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
straint system can be obtained from any
retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratch-
Mercedes-Benz Center.
eting sound can be heard to indicate that
the special seat belt retractor is activated.
The belt is now locked. Push down on child
restraint to take up any slack.

1 BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens


Automotive Corp.

68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

A statement by the child restraint man-


Warning! G ufacturer of compliance with this stan- Warning! G
dard can be found on the instruction
Never release the seat belt buckle while the Children 12 years old and under must never
label on the restraint and in the instruc-
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat ride in the front seat, except in a
tion manual provided with the restraint.
belt retractor will be deactivated. Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
When using any infant or child restraint compatible child seat, which operates with
system, be sure to carefully read and the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
! follow all manufacturer’s instructions hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
The use of infant or child restraints is for installation and use. bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
required by law in all 50 states, the Dis- they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories, Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
and all Canadian provinces. fatal injury will result.
or child restraints.
Infants and small children should be According to accident statistics, children
seated in an appropriate infant or child are safer when properly restrained in the
restraint system properly secured by a rear seating positions than in the front seat-
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a ing positions. Infants and small children
child restraint lower anchorage system must ride in back seats and be seated in an
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor appropriate infant or child restraint system,
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 which is properly secured with the vehicle's
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
Standards 213 and 210.2. lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er's instructions. 컄컄
1
BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.

69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

컄컄 Special BabySmartTM compatible child


Infants and small children should never Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
seats, designed for use with the
share a seat belt with another occupant. hicle; even if the children are secured in a
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
During an accident, they could be crushed child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, are
between the occupant and seat belt. dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
required for use with the BabySmartTM air-
Children too big for child restraint systems hicle equipment and may cause an accident
bag deactivation system. With the special
must ride in back seats using regular seat and/or serious personal injury.
child seat properly installed, the passenger
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest front airbag will not deploy.
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation
seat may be necessary to achieve proper system The PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until located in the center console will be illumi-
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder nated, except with the SmartKey removed
belt fits properly without a booster. or in starter switch position 0.

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is i


significantly increased if the child restraints The system does not deactivate the
are not properly secured in the vehicle and side impact airbag, the window curtain
the child is not properly secured in the child airbag and the emergency tensioning
restraint. device.
When the child restraint is not in use, re-
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the 1 Indicator lamp
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
cident.

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens


Automotive Corp.

70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Self-test BabySmartTM1 without special


child seat installed Warning! G Warning! G
After turning the SmartKey in the starter The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys- When using a BabySmartTM compatible
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the tem will ONLY work with a special child seat child seat on the front passenger seat, the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or designed to operate with it. It will not work passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
twice, the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator with child seats which are not BabySmartTM the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp re-
lamp 1 located in the center console compatible. mains illuminated.
comes on for approximately six seconds
and then goes out. Never place anything between seat cushion Please be sure to check the indicator every
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces time you use the special system child seat.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or the effectiveness of the deactivation sys- Should the light go out while the restraint is
is continuously lit, the system is not func- tem. The bottom of the child seat must installed, please check installation. If the
tioning. You must see an authorized make full contact with the passenger seat light remains out, do not use the
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
child on the passenger seat. could cause injuries to the child in case of an on the front passenger seat until the system
More information can be found in the accident, instead of protecting the child. has been repaired.
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 313). Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.

1 BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens


Automotive Corp.

71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Installation of infant and child restraint 왘 Guide top tether strap between head
Warning! G systems restraint and top of seat back.

Do not place powered-on laptops, cell Head restraint must be installed and
phones and like electronic devices on the positioned such that the top tether
front passenger seat. Signals from such de- strap can pass freely between the head
vices may interfere with the BabySmartTM1 restraint and the top of seat back.
system. Such signal interference may cause Make sure the tether strap is not twist-
the PASS. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not to ed.
come on during self-test or be continuously
왘 Fold backrest back until it locks in
lit, indicating that the system is not
place.
functioning.
1 Anchorage ring
G
1 BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp. 2 Hook Warning!

Anchorage rings 1 are located on the rear Always lock backrest in its upright position
side of outer rear backrests. when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-
Prior to installing a tether strap, note the sengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
following steps: use. Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.
왘 Open the trunk and release the back-
rest.
왘 Fold backrest forward.

72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

왘 Fold up anchorage ring 1. Child seat anchors – LATCH type i


This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH The child seat must be firmly attached
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) in the right and left side anchors.
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a LATCH child seat with To fold anchors back
matching anchor fittings.
왘 Press down button 2 on each anchor
If child seats are not installed, the LATCH and return the anchor to its catch.
anchors can be folded back between the
seat cushion and the seat backrest. i
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
1 Anchorage ring be used and can be installed using the
2 Hook vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part instructions.
of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 1.

i Warning! G
For safety, please make sure the hook Children too big for child restraint systems
has attached to the ring beyond the
왘 Grip inner side of anchors 1 and fold must ride in back seats using regular seat
safety catch, as illustrated. belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
forward until they audibly lock in place.
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
왘 Install child seat according to the man-
seat may be necessary to achieve proper 컄컄
ufacturer’s instructions.

73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

컄컄 Blocking of rear side window operation !


belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder Operation of the rear side windows
belt fits properly without a booster. with the switches located in the driver’s
door is still possible.
Before installing the child seat, make sure
anchors 1 are folded out and locked in
place.
Warning! G
Install child seat according to manufactur-
er’s instructions. Activate the override switch when children
The child seat must be firmly attached in the are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
right and left side anchor 1. The children may otherwise injure them-
1 Override switch selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
dow opening.
loose during an accident which could result 왘 Slide override switch 1 to the right.
in serious injury or death to your child. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
The rear side windows can no longer be SmartKey from the starter switch take the
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or operated using the switches located in SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
child seat anchor fittings must be replaced. the rear trim panel. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
hicle, even if the children are secured in a unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
child restraint system. cle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

74
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior Activating i
lamps will operate for approximately For operation in the USA only: This de-
2½ minutes. 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least
vice complies with Part 15 of the
one second.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Deactivating
(1) This device may not cause harmful
왘 Press button 1 again interference, and
or (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
왘 Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
1 Â button
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

75
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of ac- Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) cidents:
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces
i ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
앫 Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
In winter operation, the maximum ef-
fectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, and The ABS, BAS, and ESP cannot reduce this effectiveness.
the ESP is only achieved with winter risk.
tires (M+S tires) or snow chains as re- Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
quired. vailing road and weather conditions. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even with light brake pressure.

76
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

The - indicator lamp in the instrument Emergency brake maneuver BAS


cluster (컄 page 22) comes on when you
왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
brake pedal.
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* emergency situations. If you apply the
start/stop button twice. It goes out when brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
the engine is running. Warning! G provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
tially reducing the braking distance. Apply
Braking The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of continuous full braking pressure until the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can emergency braking situation is over. The
At the instant one of the wheels is about to it increase braking or steering efficiency be- ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the yond that afforded by the condition of the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in When you release the brake pedal, the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
the regulating mode. brakes function again as normal. The BAS
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
is then deactivated.
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the those resulting from excessive speed in
brake pedal while experiencing the pul- turns, following another vehicle too closely, For more information, see “Practical hints”
sation. or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and (컄 page 305).
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
pabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
namely braking power and the ability to
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
steer the vehicle.
er’s safety or the safety of others.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions and
For more information, see “Practical hints”
functions as a reminder to take extra care
(컄 page 305).
while driving.

77
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

ESP
Warning! G Warning! G
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of monitors the vehicle's traction (force of Never switch off the ESP when you see the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can adhesive friction between the tires and the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the in-
it increase braking efficiency beyond that af- road surface) and handling. strument cluster. In this case, proceed as
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes follows:
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
prevent accidents, including those resulting as possible.
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
from excessive speed in turns, following an-
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to 앫 While driving, ease upon the accelera-
other vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially tor.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
useful while driving off and on wet or slip- 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
pery road surfaces. the prevailing road conditions.
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which The ESP warning lamp v in the instru- Failure to observe these guidelines could
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the ment cluster flashes when the ESP is en- cause the vehicle to skid.
safety of others. gaged. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
The warning lamp v in the instrument from excessive speed.
cluster comes on when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button twice. It goes out when
the engine is running.

78
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

! Switching off the ESP


Warning! G Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
tion, the engine must be shut off Warning! G
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
or 1 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop but- The ESP should not be switched off during
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
ton in position 0 or 1) when normal driving other than in the circum-
cannot prevent accidents, including those
앫 the parking brake is being tested on stances described below. Disabling of the
resulting from excessive speed in turns or
a brake test dynamometer system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
dard driving maneuvers.
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca- 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must front axle raised
never be exploited in a reckless or danger- To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
ous manner which could jeopardize the us- Active braking action through the ESP the ESP in driving situations where it would
er’s safety or the safety of others. may otherwise seriously damage the be advantageous to have the drive wheels
brake system. spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
The ESP will only function properly if grip such as:
i
you use wheels of the recommended 앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in
Distronic* is switched off when ESP is
tire size. deep snow in conjunction with snow
activated.
chains
For more information, see “Practical hints” 앫 sand or gravel
(컄 page 305).
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.

79
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Traction control brakes a spinning wheel Switching on the ESP


even when the ESP is deactivated.
왘 Press lower half 2 of the ESP switch
The ESP always operates when you are until the ESP warning lamp v in the
braking, even when it has been deactivat- instrument cluster goes out.
ed.
You are now again in normal driving
! mode.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
1 ESP off the drivetrain which is not covered by
2 ESP on the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘 Press upper half 1 of the ESP switch
until the ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on. Warning! G
The ESP is deactivated. When the ESP warning lamp v is
If one or more drive wheels are spinning, illuminated continuously, the ESP is
the ESP warning lamp v in the instru- switched off.
ment cluster flashes, regardless of the Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
speed. ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.

80
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Deactivating i
앫 With the SmartKey: Inserting the In case the engine cannot be started
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
SmartKey in the starter switch deacti- (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
persons from starting your vehicle.
vates the immobilizer. the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Activating 앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the en-
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
gine by means of the start/stop button
앫 With the SmartKey: Removing the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
on the gear selector lever deactivates
SmartKey from the starter switch acti-
the immobilizer.
vates the immobilizer.
앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the en-
gine by means of the start/stop button
on the gear selector lever activates the
immobilizer.

81
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Anti-theft alarm system i i


If the alarm stays on for more than If the turn signal lamps do not flash
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi- three times one of the following ele-
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys- ments may not be properly closed:
someone opens
tem (컄 page 251) provided Tele Aid 앫 a door
앫 a door service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular 앫 the trunk lid
앫 the trunk
service and GPS coverage are avail- Close the respective element and lock
앫 the hood. able. the vehicle again.
The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-
ing element (a door, for example) is imme- Arming the alarm system Disarming the alarm system
diately closed. The alarm system is armed after locking The alarm system is disarmed when you
The alarm system will also be triggered the vehicle with the SmartKey or unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or
when KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash
three times to indicate that the alarm sys- once to indicate that the alarm system is
앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle
tem is activated. The indicator lamp in the deactivated
앫 the vehicle is opened with the mechan- switch for the tow-away alarm will flash af-
ical key. ter approximately 30 seconds when the i
alarm system is completely armed The alarm system will rearm automati-
(컄 page 25). cally again after approximately 40 sec-
onds if no door was opened.

82
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Canceling the alarm Tow-away alarm Arming tow-away alarm


To cancel the alarm: When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
alarm is automatically armed after about
and audible alarm will be triggered when
With the SmartKey 30 seconds.
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter When you unlock your vehicle, the
switch. i tow-away protection disarms
The tow-away protection alarm is trig- automatically.
or
gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the ed on one side.
SmartKey.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
With KEYLESS-GO*
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
왘 Grasp the outside door handle. tem (컄 page 251) provided Tele Aid
or service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop service and GPS coverage are avail-
button. able.

83
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Disarming tow-away alarm i Canceling the alarm


To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm To cancel the alarm:
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be- while the ignition is turned on.
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on With the SmartKey
a surface subject to movement, such as a 왘 Press upper half 1 of the switch. 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
ferry or auto train.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch comes switch.
The switch is located on the center con- on briefly. or
sole.
왘 Exit and lock your vehicle with the 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey or (vehicles with SmartKey.
KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each
door handle. With KEYLESS-GO*
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un- 왘 Grasp the outside door handle.
til you lock your vehicle again.
or
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button.

1 Tow-away alarm off switch


2 Indicator lamp
왘 Turn off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey.

84
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Audio system
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features

85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왔 Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will SmartKeys
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- Your vehicle comes supplied with two
cle. If you are already familiar with the SmartKeys, each with remote control and
basic functions of your vehicle, this section a removable mechanical key. The locking
will be of particular interest to you. tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
distinguish each SmartKey unit.
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual. The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
The corresponding page numbers are giv- ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
SmartKey with remote controls
en at the beginning of each segment. advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it. 1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk lid
! 3 Mechanical key locking tab
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid 4 ΠUnlock button
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of 5 Battery check lamp
electromagnetic radiation. 6 Â Panic button (컄 page 75)

The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: i


You can also open and close the power
앫 the doors windows (컄 page 212) and slid-
앫 the trunk ing/pop-up roof* (컄 page 216) using
the SmartKey.
앫 the fuel filler flap

86
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Factory setting Selective setting Restoring to factory setting


If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
Global unlocking
to reprogram the SmartKey so that simultaneously for about six seconds
왘 Press button Œ. pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s until battery check lamp 5 flashes
door and the fuel filler flap. twice.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
The vehicle will lock again automatically simultaneously for about five seconds Warning! G
within approximately 40 seconds of un- until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
locking if neither door nor trunk is opened,
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter The SmartKey will then function as fol-
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
switch, or if the central locking switch is lows:
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
not activated.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
flap unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
Global locking
왘 Press button Œ once. to open a locked door from the inside, which
왘 Press button ‹. could result in an accident and/or serious
Global unlocking personal injury.
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move 왘 Press button Œ twice.
down. Global locking
왘 Press button ‹.

87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

! Checking the batteries Unlocking and opening the trunk lid


If you can no longer lock or unlock the 왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. You can unlock and open the trunk lid sep-
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the arately.
Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief-
batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter- A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
charged, the SmartKey is malfunction-
ies are in order. (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
ing or the vehicle battery is drained.
! 왘 Press and hold button Š until the
앫 Check the batteries in the
trunk lid unlocks and begins to open.
SmartKey and replace them if nec- If battery check lamp 5 does not
essary (컄 page 345). come on briefly during check, then the !
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
the doors (컄 page 343) and the Replace the batteries (컄 page 345). tomatically. Always make sure there is
trunk (컄 page 344). sufficient overhead clearance.
You can obtain the required batteries
앫 Have the vehicle battery and the at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
battery connections checked. ter. system*: To stop the opening proce-
앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the dure, press button Š. The Trunk lid
doors and the trunk (컄 page 344). i stops moving.

If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con- If the batteries are checked within sig-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- nal range of the vehicle, pressing
ter. the ‹ or Œ button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.

88
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*


If the trunk lid does not open, it is still If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
Specially equipped vehicles come with two
locked separately (if applicable) you should do the following:
SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with
(컄 page 104).
왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an remote control and a removable mechani-
If the vehicle was previously centrally authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. cal key. The locking tabs for the mechani-
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- cal key portion of the two SmartKeys are a
왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
cally when closed (컄 page 97). The different color to help distinguish each
mechanical key immediately to your
turn signals will flash three times to SmartKey unit.
car insurance company.
confirm locking.
왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
replaced. into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
The trunk can also be opened from its in- validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
side in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emer- Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is checked every time you pull a door
gency release” (컄 page 103). will be glad to supply you with a replace- handle.
ment.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electro-
magnetic radiation.

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is valid,


your vehicle unlocks
앫 the doors
앫 the trunk lid

89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

앫 the fuel filler flap Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO*


Warning! G 앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the (컄 page 86).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and 앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- tions with normal SmartKey functions
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- locking with the remote control).
cle equipment may cause an accident
앫 Always carry the SmartKey with
and/or serious personal injury.
KEYLESS-GO with you.
SmartKey with remote controls
앫 Never store the SmartKey with
1 ‹ Lock button i KEYLESS-GO together with:
2 Š Opening button for trunk lid You can also open and close the power
3 Mechanical key locking tab 앫 electronic items such as a cellular
windows (컄 page 212) and slid-
4 Œ Unlock button ing/pop-up roof* (컄 page 216) using phone or another SmartKey with
5 Battery check lamp the SmartKey. KEYLESS-GO
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 75) 앫 metallic objects such as coins or
For more information on using the i metal foil
SmartKey buttons, see “SmartKeys” If the vehicle has been parked for a Doing so could impair the function of
(컄 page 86) longer period of time, you must pull the the KEYLESS-GO system.
door handle in order to activate the
KEYLESS-GO function.

90
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the 앫 This does not apply if, after starting, the 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-
SmartKey with KEYLESS-Go must be lo- gear selector lever is still in position P. moved from the vehicle while the igni-
cated outside the vehicle within ap- and the SmartKey is then inserted in tion is switched on (e.g. if passenger
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the the starter switch. The SmartKey will exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
trunk. then have priority over the with KEYLESS-GO), the message Key
KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’s not recognized! will appear in the
앫 In order to start the engine with the
electrical system will operate accord- multifunction display.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
ing to the position of the SmartKey in
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
앫 the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO the starter switch, even stopping the
change its present location immediate-
must be located in the vehicle engine.
ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger
앫 all the doors must be closed 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
앫 the brake pedal must be depressed positioned farther away from the vehi-
앫 Remember that the engine can be
cle the system may no longer recognize
앫 If you have started the engine with the started by anyone with a SmartKey
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle cannot be locked or the engine
can only turn it off again with this but- vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
started via the KEYLESS-GO system.
ton, even if you have put the SmartKey KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
in the starter switch in the meantime. locking the vehicle, the message Key
recognized in vehicle! will appear in
the multifunction display.

91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Factory setting Selective setting Restoring to factory setting


If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
Global unlocking
to reprogram the SmartKey with simultaneously for about six seconds
왘 Pull the door handle. KEYLESS-GO so when you, grasp the driv- until battery check lamp 5 flashes
er’s door handle only the driver’s door and twice.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
the fuel filler flap unlocks.
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
locking if neither door nor trunk is opened. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ Warning! G
simultaneously for about five seconds
i until battery check lamp 5 flashes When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
The vehicles could inadvertently be un- twice. SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
locked if the SmartKey with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
then function as follows:
vehicle and: tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
앫 the door handle is splashed with
flap to open a locked door from the inside, which
water, or
왘 Grasp the driver’s door handle. could result in an accident and/or serious
앫 you attempt to clean the door personal injury.
handle. Global unlocking
왘 Grasp the door handle on the pas-
Global locking senger side.
왘 Press lock button at door handle Global locking
(컄 page 55) or trunk lid (컄 page 93).
왘 Press lock button at door handle or
trunk lid.

92
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

! Locking the vehicle Checking the batteries


If you can no longer lock or unlock the 왘 Press button ‹ or Œ.
vehicle with the SmartKey with
Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief-
KEYLESS-GO, then the batteries in the
ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter-
SmartKey are discharged, the
ies are in order.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is mal-
functioning or the vehicle battery is !
drained. If battery check lamp 5 does not
앫 Check the batteries in the come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey and replace them if nec- SmartKey batteries are discharged.
essary (컄 page 345). 1 lock button at trunk Replace the batteries (컄 page 345).
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock 왘 Press the lock button 1. You can obtain the required batteries
the doors (컄 page 343) and the
or at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
trunk (컄 page 344).
ter.
앫 Have the vehicle battery and the 왘 Press the lock button at the driver’s
battery connections checked. door (컄 page 55).
i
앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the or If the batteries are checked within sig-
doors and the trunk (if applicable) 왘 Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing nal range of the vehicle, pressing
(컄 page 344). system*, press the KEYLESS-GO lock- the ‹ or Œ button will lock or
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is ing/closing switch at the trunk lid unlock the vehicle accordingly.
malfunctioning, contact an authorized (컄 page 102).
Mercedes-Benz Center. The vehicle locks. The turn signals
blinks three times to confirm locking.

93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Unlocking and opening the trunk lid ! Closing the side windows and
The trunk lid swings open upwards au- sliding/pop-up roof*
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. tomatically. Always make sure there is 왘 Press and hold lock button at door
sufficient overhead clearance. (컄 page 55) until the side windows and
The handle is located in the rear license
Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing the sliding/pop-up roof* are closed.
plate recess.
system*: To stop the opening proce-
dure, press button Š. The Trunk lid Warning! G
stops moving.
When closing the windows and the
i sliding/pop-up roof*, make sure there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the clos-
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
ing procedure.
locked separately (if applicable)
(컄 page 104) If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
lows:
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- 앫 Release the lock button.
1 Handle
cally when closed (컄 page 97). The 앫 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
왘 Pull on handle 1. turn signals will flash three times to The side windows and the
The trunk opens. confirm locking. sliding/pop-up roof* will open for about
two seconds if the door handle is held
or but the door not opened.
The trunk can also be opened from its in-
왘 Press and hold button Š until the side in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emer-
trunk unlocks and begins to open. gency release” (컄 page 103).

94
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Opening the doors from the inside i
If you lose your SmartKey with If the vehicle has previously been
You can open a locked door from the in-
KEYLESS-GO, you should do the following: locked from the outside with the
side. Open doors only when conditions are
SmartKey, opening a door from the in-
왘 Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO safe to do so.
side will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-
deactivated by an authorized
tem.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
왘 Report the loss immediately to your car
following:
insurance company.
With the SmartKey
왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary. 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replace- 앫 Press button ‹ or Œ on the
ment. SmartKey.
1 Locking knob With KEYLESS-GO*
2 Inside door handle
앫 Grasp the outside door handle.
왘 Pull on door handle 2.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will button.
move up.

95
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i Opening the trunk !


If you open a door, the side windows on The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
that side of the vehicle will lower slight- Opening the trunk from outside tomatically. Always make sure there is
ly. The windows close again when you (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) sufficient overhead clearance.
close the door.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. i
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
The handle is located in the rear license
locked separately (if applicable)
plate recess.
(컄 page 105).
The vehicle must be unlocked.

The trunk can also be opened using the


SmartKey (컄 page 88) or from its inside in
an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency
release” (컄 page 103).

1 Handle
왘 Pull on handle 1.
The trunk opens

96
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Opening the trunk from the inside ! Closing the trunk


You can open the trunk from the inside if The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
the vehicle is stationary. tomatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
i
The switch is located on the driver’s door.
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
locked separately (if applicable)
(컄 page 104)
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- 1 Handle
cally when closed (컄 page 97). The
turn signals will flash three times to 왘 Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
confirm locking. handle 1.
왘 Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
The trunk can also be opened using the on it.
1 Remote trunk lid switch with indicator SmartKey (컄 page 88) or from its inside in
lamp an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency
release” (컄 page 103).
Warning! G
왘 Press remote trunk lid switch 1.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
The trunk lid opens. The indicator lamp
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
in the switch remains lit as long as the
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be espe-
trunk is open.
cially careful when small children are
around.

97
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Trunk lid opening/closing system* The trunk lid opens. The indicator lamp
Warning! G in the switch comes on and remains lit
until the trunk is closed.
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among oth- Opening the trunk from the inside
er dangers, such as your view being blocked, You can open the trunk from the inside if !
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle the vehicle is stationary. The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
interior. tomatically. Always make sure there is
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
sufficient overhead clearance. To stop
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
i the opening procedure, press the re-
The switch for opening and closing the mote trunk lid opening or closing
Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk is located on the driver’s door. switch.
trunk. You may lock yourself out.

i
i
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
locked separately (if applicable)
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
(컄 page 104)
out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is If the vehicle was previously centrally
recognized inside the vehicle or in the locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-
trunk. cally when closed (컄 page 97). The
turn signals will flash three times to
1 Remote trunk lid opening switch confirm locking.
2 Remote trunk lid closing switch
왘 Press remote trunk lid opening
switch 1 until the trunk lid begins to
open.

98
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

The trunk can also be opened using the Closing the trunk from the inside
SmartKey (컄 page 88) or from its inside in
왘 Press the remote trunk lid closing
Warning! G
an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency
switch 2 (컄 page 98) until the indica- Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
release” (컄 page 103).
tor lamp in the switch goes out and the the door mounted switch. Monitor the clos-
trunk lid is closed. ing procedure carefully to ensure that no
Limiting opening height of trunk lid
To interrupt the closing procedure: one is in danger of being injured.
The trunk lid opening height can be limited
when transporting goods on a roof rack 왘 Release remote trunk lid closing To interrupt the closing procedure, release
(e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage con- switch 2. the door mounted remote trunk lid closing
tainer). When activated, the trunk lid opens switch.
to approximately the height of the roof Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
edge. SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among oth- SmartKey with you and lock your vehicle. Do
왘 With the trunk lid closed, press the re-
er dangers, such as your view being blocked, not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
mote trunk lid closing switch 2
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
(컄 page 99) and hold for at least five
interior. pervised use of vehicle equipment may
seconds.
cause an accident and/or serious personal
Depending on its previous status, the injury.
opening height limitation is then
switched on or off.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
You can activate or deactivate the opening object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
height limitation with the control system, been piled too high), the closing procedure
see “Setting trunk lid opening limiter (vehi- is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
cles with trunk lid opening/closing sys-
tem*)” (컄 page 149).

99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Closing the trunk from the outside


(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) Warning! G Warning! G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Only drive with the trunk closed. Among oth-
ensure that no one is in danger of being in- er dangers, such as your view being blocked,
jured. To prevent possible personal injury, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
always keep hands and fingers away from interior.
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
i
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid opening or clos- Do not place the SmartKey in the open
ing switch (on driver’s door), the trunk lid trunk. You may lock yourself out.

1 Trunk lid closing switch closing switch 1, or the Š button on the


SmartKey.
왘 Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
ly.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
The trunk lid closes. SmartKey with you and lock your vehicle. Do
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
been piled too high), the closing procedure pervised use of vehicle equipment may
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly. cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

100
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Closing the trunk from the outside i


(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
Warning! G
out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
ensure that no one is in danger of being in-
recognized inside the vehicle or in the
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
trunk.
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
Warning! G are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid opening or clos-
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among oth-
ing switch (on driver’s door), the trunk lid
er dangers, such as your view being blocked,
1 Trunk lid closing switch closing switch 1, or the Š button on the
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with interior.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
KEYLESS-GO with you.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
왘 Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
ly. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
The trunk lid closes. attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an cle equipment may cause an accident
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has and/or serious personal injury.
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.

101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Closing the trunk and locking the vehi- If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
cle from the outside (vehicles with object while closing (e.g. luggage that has Warning! G
KEYLESS-GO*) been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being in-
i jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock- always keep hands and fingers away from
out, the trunk lid will open automatical- the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is Be especially careful when small children
recognized inside the vehicle or in the are around. To stop the closing procedure,
trunk. press the remote trunk lid opening or clos-
ing switch (on driver’s door), the trunk lid
closing switch 1, or the Š button on the
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch Warning! G SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
You can close the trunk lid and lock the ve- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among oth-
hicle simultaneously. SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
er dangers, such as your view being blocked,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
KEYLESS-GO with you. interior.
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
왘 Press switch 1 briefly. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid cle equipment may cause an accident
closes automatically. The turn signals and/or serious personal injury.
flash three times to confirm locking.

102
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Trunk lid emergency release i i


The emergency release button does If the emergency release button is
The emergency release button is located
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle bat- pressed and the vehicle was centrally
on the inside of the trunk lid.
tery is discharged or disconnected. locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
왘 Briefly press emergency release opens. To cancel the alarm, do one of
button 1. the following:
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid 앫 press button Œ or ‹ on the
opens. SmartKey.
앫 insert the SmartKey in the starter
i
switch.
The emergency release button unlocks
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
1 Emergency release button standing or driving. 앫 pull the outside door handle.
Illumination of the emergency release but- 앫 press the start/stop button.
ton:
앫 The button will flash for 30 minutes af-
ter opening the trunk.
앫 The button will flash for 60 minutes af-
ter closing the trunk.

103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Separately locking the trunk The lock is located next to the recessed The trunk remains locked even when the
handle. vehicle is centrally unlocked.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a func-
tion permitting the separate locking of the i
trunk using the mechanical key. If present, You can only cancel the separate trunk
this feature can permit you to deny any un- locking mode by means of the
authorized person access to the trunk by mechanical key.
locking the trunk separately and leaving
the SmartKey less the mechanical key with
the vehicle.
To verify the presence of this feature, use
the mechanical key to lock the trunk and
then attempt to open the trunk by pulling 1 Neutral position
the trunk lid handle after the vehicle has 2 Locked
been centrally unlocked with the 왘 Close the trunk lid (컄 page 97)
SmartKey.
왘 Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 343).
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2.

104
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Separately unlocking the trunk Automatic central locking i


The doors unlock automatically after an
왘 Pull the mechanical key out of the The doors and the trunk automatically lock
accident if the force of the impact ex-
SmartKey (컄 page 343). when the ignition is switched on and the
ceeds a preset threshold.
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap-
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The vehicle automatically locks when
lid lock.
the ignition is switched on and the
You can open a locked door from the in-
왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclock- wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
side. Open doors only when conditions are
wise to neutral position 1. approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
safe to do so.
You can now open the trunk more. You could therefore lock yourself
(컄 page 96). out when the vehicle
앫 is pushed or towed
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. 앫 is on a test stand

Warning! G You can deactivate the automatic locking


using the control system (컄 page 149).
Only drive with the trunk closed. Among oth- For more information on towing the vehi-
er dangers, such as your view being blocked, cle, see “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 368).
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.

105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking from the inside The switch is located in the center console. Unlocking
왘 Press lower half 2 of the central lock-
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
ing switch.
trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if The vehicle unlocks.
you want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive. i
You can open a locked door from the
The fuel filler flap will not be locked or un-
inside. Open doors only when condi-
locked with the central locking switch.
tions are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
Warning! G Central locking switch locked with the SmartKey or the
1 Locking SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*, it will
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
2 Unlocking not unlock using the central locking
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
switch.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- Locking If the vehicle was previously locked
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an 왘 Press upper half 1 of the central lock- with the central locking switch
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- ing switch. 앫 while in the global remote control
cle equipment may cause an accident mode, the vehicle is completely un-
If both doors are closed, the vehicle
and/or serious personal injury. locked when a door is opened from
locks.
the inside.
앫 while in the selective remote con-
trol mode, only the door opened
from inside is unlocked.

106
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be You can activate the following functions:
found in the “Getting started” section Warning! G 앫 Steering column:
(컄 page 34).
You must ensure that no one can become Only the steering column is adjusted.
Easy-entry/exit feature trapped or injured by the moving steering
앫 Steering column and seat:
wheel and driver’s seat when the
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, easy-entry/exit feature is activated, the Both the steering column and the seat
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver’s door is being opened, and the en- are adjusted.
driver’s seat moves to the rear. gine is turned off or the SmartKey removed The easy-entry/exit feature can be
from the starter switch. Do not leave chil- switched on or off in the convenience sub-
This allows easier entry into and exit from
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac- menu of the control system (컄 page 150).
the vehicle when the driver’s door is
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
open the driver's door and unintentionally i
activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which To cancel seat /steering wheel move-
When the SmartKey is inserted in the start- could result in an accident and/or serious ment, do one of the following:
er switch or you have pressed the personal injury.
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once and 앫 Press seat adjustment switch
the driver’s door is closed, the steering (컄 page 34).
wheel and the driver’s seat return to their 앫 Move the steering column stalk
last set positions. (컄 page 38).
앫 Press the memory button
(컄 page 116)

107
Controls in detail
Seats

Removing and installing front seat i Installing front head restraints:


head restraints Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for 왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
easier removal and installation of the about five seconds.
Information on head restraint adjustment
head restraints.
can be found in the “Getting started” sec- 왘 Push the head restraint down until it
tion (컄 page 36). engages.
Front seat head restraints
왘 Adjust head restraint to desired posi-
Warning! G tion (컄 page 36).

For your protection, drive only with properly


positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat Removing front head restraints
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
the head restraint is fully extended.

Do not interchange head restraints from 왘 Pull out head restraint.


front and rear seat.

108
Controls in detail
Seats

Rear seats head restraints Lowering: Folding head restraints back with re-
lease button
왘 To lower the head restraint, push re-
Head restraint height lease button 1 and press down on the
head restraint.

Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten- 1 Release button
tial for injury to the head and neck in the
1 Release button 왘 Push release button 1.
event of an accident or similar situation.
Raising: The head restraints will fold backward.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
왘 Manually adjust the height of the head head restraints. Head restraints are intend- i
restraint by pulling it upward. ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
You can also fold the head restraints
dent.
If the head restraint is fully retracted, back using the switch in the center
push release button 1 and pull the console.
head restraint out.

109
Controls in detail
Seats

Folding head restraints back with Placing rear head restraints upright
switch in the center console Warning! G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.

왘 Pull the rear head restraint forward un-


1 Head restraint release button til it locks into position.
왘 Start the engine. !
왘 Press the symbol-side on the rocker Make sure the head restraints engage
switch 1 to release the head re- when placing them upright. Otherwise
straints. their protective function cannot be as-
sured.
The head restraints will fold backward.

Head restraint tilt


Two different head restraint angle posi-
tions are available.
왘 Press the release button and tilt the
head restraint to the desired position.

110
Controls in detail
Seats

Removing and installing rear seats Installing rear head restraints


head restraints
왘 Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.
Warning! G 왘 Push release button 1 and adjust
head restraint to desired position.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
1 Release button
tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Removing rear seat head restraints
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
왘 Fold back head restraint.
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- 왘 Pull head restraint to its highest posi-
dent. tion.
Do not interchange head restraints from 왘 Push release button 1 and pull out
front and rear seat. head restraint.

111
Controls in detail
Seats

Multicontour seat* 왘 Start the engine.

The multicontour seat has a movable seat Seat cushion depth


cushion and inflatable air cushions built
왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
into the backrest to provide additional lum-
length of your upper leg using
bar and side support.
switch 1.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be con- Backrest contour
tinuously varied with switches on the right
왘 Adjust the contour of the backrest to
side of the seat after starting the engine.
1 Seat cushion depth the desired position using switches 2
2 Backrest bottom and 3.
3 Backrest center
4 Side bolster adjustment Backrest side bolsters
왘 Adjust the backrest side bolsters so
that they provide good lateral support
using switch 4.

112
Controls in detail
Seats

Seat ventilation* 왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. !


All lamps in the instrument cluster If one or all of the lamps flash on the
Both switches for the front seats are locat- seat ventilation switch, there is insuffi-
come on.
ed in the center console. cient voltage due to too many electrical
Switching on seat ventilation consumers being switched on. The seat
ventilation switches off automatically.
왘 Press lower switch position 1.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
Two blue indicator lamps on the switch
again automatically as soon as suffi-
come on.
cient voltage is available.
왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until the
desired seat ventilation level is
reached.

1 Seat ventilation Switching off seat ventilation


왘 Press lower switch position 1 repeat-
The blue indicator lamps on the switch
show which ventilation level you have edly until all blue indicator lamps go
selected: out.

Level
2 Two indicator lamps on
1 One indicator lamp on
off No indicator lamp on

113
Controls in detail
Seats

Seat heating* Switching on seat heating Switching off rapid seat heating
왘 Press upper switch position 1. 왘 Press lower switch position 2.
Vehicles without seat ventilation* A red indicator lamp on the switch !
Both switches for the front seats are locat- comes on.
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
ed in the center console. heater switch are flashing, there is in-
Switching off seat heating
sufficient voltage available since too
왘 Press upper switch position 1 again. many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off auto-
i matically.
The seat heating will be automatically
The seat heater will switch back on
switched off after approximately
again automatically as soon as suffi-
20 minutes.
cient voltage is available.
Switching on rapid seat heating

1 Normal heating 왘 Press lower switch position 2.


2 Rapid heating Both red indicator lamps on the switch
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. come on.

All the lamps in the instrument cluster i


come on. The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately ten
minutes. Only one indicator lamp re-
mains lit.

114
Controls in detail
Seats

Vehicles with seat ventilation* 왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. i
Both switches for the front seats are locat- All the lamps in the instrument cluster The system switches over to normal
ed in the center console. come on. heating mode after approximately ten
minutes. Only one indicator lamp re-
Switching on seat heating mains lit.
왘 Press upper switch position 1 twice.
Switching off rapid seat heating mode
A red indicator lamp on the switch
왘 Press switch position 1 twice.
comes on.
!
Switching off seat heating
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
왘 Press upper switch position 1 again. heating switch are flashing, there is in-
sufficient voltage due to too many elec-
1 Seat heating i trical consumers are turned on. The
The red indicator lamps on the switch The seat heating will be automatically seat heating switches off
show the heating level you have selected: switched off after approximately automatically.
20 minutes.
Level The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as suffi-
2 Two indicator lamps on Switching on rapid seat heating
cient voltage is available.
1 One indicator lamp on 왘 Press upper switch position 1 once.
off No indicator lamp on Both red indicator lamps on the switch
come on.

115
Controls in detail
Memory function
왔 Memory function
! The memory button and stored position
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv- switch are located on the door. Warning! G
er should check and adjust the seat You can store up to three different settings Do not activate the memory function while
height, seat position fore and aft, and for each SmartKey or SmartKey with driving. Activating the memory function
seat backrest angle if necessary, to en- KEYLESS-GO*. while driving could cause the driver to lose
sure adequate control, reach and com-
The following settings are saved for each control of the vehicle.
fort. The head restraint should also be
stored position:
adjusted for proper height. See also the
section on airbags (컄 page 59) for 앫 Driver’s seat, backrest and restraint
proper seat positioning. position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to 앫 Settings for multicontour seat*
ensure adequate control, reach, opera- 앫 Steering wheel position
tion and comfort. Both the interior and
exterior rear view mirrors should be ad- 앫 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
justed for adequate rear vision. position
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small 앫 Passenger side exterior rear view mir-
children should be seated in a properly ror position
secured restraint system that complies These key-dependent memory settings 1 Memory button
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety can be deactivated if desired 2 Stored position button
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian (컄 page 151). 왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
or the relevant door is open and the
and 210.2.
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.

116
Controls in detail
Memory function

Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory


Warning! G
왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and 왘 Turn button 2 to selected memory po-
rear view mirrors to the desired posi- sition. Do not operate the power seats using the
tion (컄 page 34). memory button if the seat backrest is in an
왘 Press and hold button 2 until the seat,
excessively reclined position. Doing so
왘 Turn button 2 to selected memory po- steering wheel and rear view mirrors
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
sition. have fully moved to the stored posi-
tions. First move the seat backrest to an upright
왘 Press memory button 1. position.
왘 Release memory button and push i
button 2 within three seconds. Releasing the button immediately
All the settings are stored at the select- stops movement to the stored posi-
ed position. tions.

117
Controls in detail
Memory function

Storing exterior rear view mirror park- 왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
ing position with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-
왘 Press memory button 1.
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as 왘 Within three seconds, press bottom of
soon as you engage reverse gear R. adjustment button 2.
For information on activating the parking The parking position is stored if the
position feature, see “Setting parking posi- mirror does not move.
tion for exterior rear view mirror”
(컄 page 151). 1 Memory button i
2 Adjustment button If the mirror does move, repeat the
i 3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- above steps. After the setting is stored
You can store a parking position for the ror button you can move the mirror again.
passenger-side exterior rear view mir- 왘 Stop the vehicle.
ror for each SmartKey or SmartKey
왘 Switch on ignition (if not already on).
with KEYLESS-GO*.
왘 Press button 3.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.

118
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the head- Exterior lamp switch M Off
lamps and use the turn signals, see
U Automatic headlamp mode
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 47). The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. C Parking lamps (also side marker
i lamps, tail lamps, license plate
If you drive in countries where vehicles lamps, instrument panel lamps)
drive on the other side of the road than Canada only:
the country where the vehicle is regis- When engine is running, the low
tered, you must have the headlamps beam is also switched on.
modified for symmetrical low beams. B Low beam plus parking lamps or
Relevant information can be obtained high beam headlamps (combination
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz switch pushed forward).
Center
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)

119
Controls in detail
Lighting

i Manual headlamp mode


To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
If you remove the SmartKey and open The low beam headlamps and parking vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
the driver’s door while the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the switch to B when driving or when traffic
lamps or low beam headlamps are exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp and/or ambient lighting conditions require
switched on, switch, see “Exterior lamp switch” you to do so.
앫 a warning sounds (컄 page 119). In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
앫 $ appears in the multifunction Automatic headlamp mode vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
display
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps to B will briefly switch off the head-
앫 the message Turn off lamps! ap- and license plate lamps switch on and off lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
pears in the multifunction display automatically depending on the brightness lighting conditions may result in an acci-
of the ambient light. dent.
i 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to U. The automatic headlamp feature is only an
With the daytime running lamp mode aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
activated and the engine running, the the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
low beam headlamps cannot be Warning! G times.
switched off manually.
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
edly when the system senses bright am-
bient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
앫 the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.

120
Controls in detail
Lighting

i Daytime running lamp mode USA only


With the daytime running lamp mode 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to The high beam headlamps can also be ac-
activated, the low beam headlamps will position M or U. tivated when driving with the daytime run-
not be switched off automatically. ning lamp mode activated and exterior
When the engine is running, the low beam
lamp switch in position M.
headlamps are automatically switched on.
i In low ambient light conditions the parking To activate the daytime running lamp
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp lamps will also switch on. mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp
cannot be switched on manually with mode (USA only)” (컄 page 145).
exterior lamp switch in position U. Canada only
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior i
When you shift from a driving position to
lamp switch to position B and pull position N or P, the low beam switches off
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
the exterior lamp switch to first or sec- (컄 page 119).
(with a three-minute delay).
ond stop (컄 page 122).
For nighttime driving you should turn the Locator lighting and night security illu-
exterior lamp switch to position B to mination
permit activation of the high beam head-
lamps. Locator lighting and night security illumi-
nation are described in the control system
section, see “Setting locator lighting”
(컄 page 146) and see “Setting night secu-
rity illumination (Exterior lamps delayed
shut-off)” (컄 page 147).

121
Controls in detail
Lighting

Switching on fog lamps i Switching on rear fog lamp


The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp 왘 Make sure the low beam headlamps
Warning! G cannot be switched on manually with are switched on.
exterior lamp switch in position U.
왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
stop.
only switch from position U to B with lamp switch to position B and pull
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from the exterior lamp switch to first or sec- The yellow indicator lamp † beside
U to B will briefly switch off the head- ond stop (컄 page 122). the lamp switch comes on.
lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an acci- Switching on front fog lamps
dent.
왘 Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
i 왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
Fog lamps will operate with the parking stop.
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in The green indicator lamp ‡ beside
conjunction with low beam headlamps. the lamp switch comes on.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding permis-
sible lamp operation.

122
Controls in detail
Lighting

Combination switch Switching on high beams Hazard warning flasher


왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
The combination switch is located on the The hazard warning flasher can be activat-
position B or to U
left side of the steering column. ed with the ignition switched on or off. It is
(컄 page 119).
activated automatically when an airbag is
왘 Push the combination switch in deployed.
direction 1.
The switch is located on the center con-
The high beam indicator A on the sole.
instrument cluster is illuminated
(컄 page 22).

High beam flasher


왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in
1 High beam direction 2.
2 High beam flasher

1 Hazard warning flasher switch

Switching on the hazard warning


flasher
왘 Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
All turn signals will flash.

123
Controls in detail
Lighting

i Interior lighting Activating automatic control


With the hazard warning flasher acti- 왘 Press rocker switch 3 to center
The controls are located in the overhead
vated and the combination switch set position.
control panel.
for either left or right turn, only the re-
Interior lamps are switched on in dark-
spective left or right turn signal will op-
ness, even when you:
erate when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is in position 1 or 2. 앫 unlock the vehicle
앫 open a door
Switching off the hazard warning
앫 remove the SmartKey from the
flasher
starter switch
왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch
The interior lamps are switched off after a
again.
preset time (컄 page 148).
i 1 Rear interior lights i
If the hazard warning flasher was acti- 2 Right front reading lamp If the door remains open, the interior
vated automatically, press switch 1 3 Rocker switch for automatic control lamps switch off automatically after ap-
twice. system proximately five minutes when the
4 Left front reading lamp SmartKey is removed or in starter
switch position 0.

124
Controls in detail
Lighting

Deactivating automatic control Switching rear interior lights on and off Door entry lamps
왘 Press the = symbol on rocker 왘 Press button V.
The appropriate door entry lamp switches
switch 3.
The lights in the rear passenger on if a door is opened in darkness and if
The interior lighting remains switched compartment come on. the interior lighting is switched to automat-
off in darkness, even when you: 왘 Press button V again. ic function.
앫 unlock the vehicle The entry lamp switches off automatically
The lights in the rear passenger
앫 open a door compartment go out. when the door is closed.

앫 remove the SmartKey from the i


Switching right front reading lamp on
starter switch If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
and off
switch to position 0 and switch off the
Manual control 왘 Press right button X. exterior headlamps, the door entry
The right reading lamp comes on. lamps will remain lit for approximately
Switching all front interior lights on and five minutes.
off 왘 Press right button X again.
왘 Press the W symbol on rocker The right reading lamp goes out.
switch 3.
Switching left front reading lamp on and
The front interior lights come on.
off
왘 Press rocker switch 3 to center 왘 Press left button X.
position to activate the automatic
control. The left reading lamp comes on.
왘 Press left button X again.
The left reading lamp goes out.

125
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination To brighten illumination
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
왘 Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
section of this manual (컄 page 22).
cluster clockwise.
The instrument cluster is activated when
The instrument cluster illumination will
you
brighten.
앫 open a door
앫 turn on the ignition To dim illumination
왘 Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
앫 press the reset button,
cluster counterclockwise.
see (컄 page 126)
The instrument cluster illumination will
앫 switch on the exterior lamps
1 Reset button dim.
You can change the instrument cluster set-
Use the reset button to adjust the illumina-
tings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
tion brightness for the instrument cluster.
the control system (컄 page 142).
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.

126
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Coolant temperature indicator i Trip odometer


Excessive coolant temperature triggers
Make sure you are viewing the trip odome-
a warning in the multifunction display
Warning! G (컄 page 323) and the red coolant warn-
ter display (컄 page 129).
ing lamp in the instrument cluster 왘 If it is not displayed, press button è
앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
comes on (컄 page 309). or ÿ on the multifunction steering
heated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine com- wheel repeatedly until the trip odome-
partment to catch fire. You could be se- During severe operating conditions, e.g. ter appears.
riously burned. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tempera- 왘 Press and hold reset button 1 on the
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can ture may rise close to 120°C. instrument cluster (컄 page 126) until
cause serious burns and can occur just The engine should not be operated with the trip odometer is reset.
by opening the hood. Stay away from the coolant temperature above 120°C. Do-
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing so may cause serious engine damage
ing from it.
which is not covered by the
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

127
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Tachometer Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the


front bumper area. Due to its location, the
The red marking on the tachometer de- sensor can be affected by road or engine
notes excessive engine speed. Warning! G heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
! The outside temperature indicator is not de- temperature can only be verified by com-
Avoid driving at excessive engine signed to serve as an ice-warning device and parison to a thermometer placed next to
speeds, as it may result in serious en- is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. the sensor, not by comparison to external
gine damage that is not covered by the Indicated temperatures just above the freez- displays (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply especially in wooded areas or on bridges. garage), you will notice a delay before the
is interrupted if the engine is operated
lower temperature is displayed.
within the red marking.
The outside temperature is displayed in A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
the multifunction display (컄 page 22). For atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
CLK 55 AMG
information on how to select the unit of the perature indications caused by heat
The tachometer of the CLK 55 AMG does displayed temperature, i.e. degrees Cel- radiated from the engine during idling or
not have a red marking denoting excessive sius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), see slow driving.
engine speed. “Selecting temperature display mode”
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply (컄 page 142)
is interrupted if the engine is operated at
an excessive engine speed.

128
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is in A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
position 1. The control system enables you must always be his/her primary focus when
to driving.

앫 call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
앫 change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for service, to set the language for Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Outside temperature
messages in the instrument cluster dis- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Trip odometer
play, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 3 Automatic transmission program mode
ly 13.5 m) every second. 4 Main odometer
i
5 Current gear selector lever position
The displays for the audio systems (ra-
The control system relays information to
dio, CD player, cassette player) will ap-
the multifunction display.
pear in English, regardless of the
language selected.

129
Controls in detail
Control system

Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display in the speed- Pressing any of the buttons on the multi-
ometer function steering wheel will alter what is
The displays in the multifunction display shown in the multifunction display.
and the settings in the control system are Operating the control system
The information available in the multifunc-
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc- 2 Selecting the submenu or setting
tion display is arranged in menus, each
tion steering wheel (컄 page 24). the volume
containing a number of functions or sub-
ç down / to decrease menus.
æ up / to increase The individual functions are then found
3 Telephone* within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
erations under Audio, for example). These
í to take a call
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
ì to end a call tion or to customize the settings for your
4 Menu systems vehicle.
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display

130
Controls in detail
Control system

It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of functions
functions within each menu, as being ar- you will find a number of submenus for
ranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
앫 If you press button è or ÿ re-
“Settings menu” (컄 page 139).
peatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
앫 If you press button k or j re-
is installed in your vehicle.
peatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in The menus are described on the following
the current menu. pages.

131
Controls in detail
Control system

Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.

132
Controls in detail
Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8


Standard dis- AUDIO NAVI* Distronic* Malfunction Settings Trip computer Telephone
play memory
Digital speed- Select radio Activate Call up set- Call up malfunc- Reset to factory Fuel consumption Load phone
ometer station route guid- tings tion messages settings statistics after book
ance start
Commands/submenus

Call up FSS Select Instrument clus- Fuel consumption Search for


satellite ra- ter submenu statistics since name in
dio station the last reset phone book
Check engine oil Operate CD Time submenu Call up range
level player*
Operate cas- Lighting sub-
sette player menu
Vehicle sub-
menu
Convenience
submenu

133
Controls in detail
Control system

i Standard display menu AUDIO menu


The headings used in the menus table
You can select the functions in the stan- The functions in the Audio menu operate
are designed to facilitate navigation
dard display menu with button k the audio equipment which you currently
within the system and are not neces-
or j. have turned on.
sarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays. The following functions are available: If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message Audio off is shown in the
The first function displayed in each Function Page
display.
menu will automatically show you
Call up digital speedometer 134
which part of the system you are in. The following functions are available:
Call up FSS 297
Function Page
Check engine oil level 283
Select radio station 135
Display digital speedometer Select satellite radio station* 135
왘 Press the j or k button repeat- Operate CD player* 136
edly until you see the digital speedom- Operate cassette player 136
eter appear in the display.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.

134
Controls in detail
Control system

Select radio station The type of search depends on the setting Select satellite radio station*
for the station tuning (컄 page 148):
왘 Turn on the radio (컄 page 186). Vehi- The Sirius -Satellite - Radio is treated as a
cles with COMAND*: Refer to separate 앫 The next stored station is selected (SP) radio application.
operating instructions.
앫 Station search 왘 Select SAT radio with the correspond-
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly ing softkey in the radio menu.
until you see the currently tuned sta- i
tion in the display. You can only store new stations using
the designated feature on the radio
(컄 page 191). Vehicles with
COMAND*: Refer to separate operat-
ing instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the 1 SAT mode and preset number
usual manner. 2 Setting for station selection using
1 Waveband memory
2 Setting for station selection using 3 Channel name or number
memory
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
3 Station frequency
until the desired channel is found.
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.

135
Controls in detail
Control system

i Operate the CD player* Operate the Cassette player*


Feature description is based on prelim- 왘 Turn on the radio and select the CD 왘 Turn on the radio and select the cas-
inary information available at time of player (컄 page 199). Vehicles with sette player (컄 page 196). Vehicles
printing. COMAND*: Refer to separate operat- with COMAND*: Refer to separate op-
For more information on satellite radio ing instructions. erating instructions.
operation, see “Satellite radio (SAT)* 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
(USA only)” (컄 page 192). until the settings for the CD currently until the settings for the cassette cur-
Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to sep- being played are shown in the display. rently being played are shown in the
arate operating instructions. display.

1 Current CD (for CD changer*)


2 Current track 1 Current side
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly 왘 Press button j to fast forward to
until the desired track is selected. the next track.

i 왘 Press button k to rewind the cas-


sette to the beginning of the current
To select a CD from the magazine,
track.
press a number on the audio system or
the COMAND* system key pad located
in the center dashboard.

136
Controls in detail
Control system

i Distronic* menu Distronic deactivated


To select the reverse side of the tape, When Distronic is deactivated you will see
Use the Distronic menu to display the cur-
press button below track number on the standard display in the display.
rent settings for your Distronic system.
the audio system display, or enter re-
What information is shown in the display
quest on the COMAND* system locat-
depends on whether the Distronic system
ed in the center dashboard.
is active or inactive.
NAV menu Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec-
tion of this manual (컄 page 221) for in-
The Nav menu contains the functions need- structions on how to activate Distronic.
ed to operate your navigation system. 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following two 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
until you see the message Nav in the pictures in the display. ahead
display. 4 Your vehicle
앫 If the navigation system is switched off, 5 Symbol for activated distance warning
the message Nav off is shown in the function
display.
앫 If the navigation system is on, the mes-
sage Nav active is shown in the dis-
play.
Please refer to the COMAND* manual for
instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.

137
Controls in detail
Control system

Distronic activated Malfunction memory menu 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly


until you see the malfunction message
When you activate Distronic, you will see
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan memory in the display.
the set speed for about five seconds in the
malfunction and warning messages that
Distronic display. The following display
may be stored in the system. What infor- No malfunction messages
then appears:
mation is shown in the display depends on
If no malfunctions have occurred, the mes-
whether malfunctions have actually oc-
sage in the display is:
curred.
No Malfunction

Warning! G Malfunctions have occurred

Malfunction and warning messages are only


If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
1 Distronic activated indicated for certain systems and are inten-
the number of malfunctions in the display:
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a remind-
er with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks 1 Number of malfunctions
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
왘 Press button k or j.
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and The stored messages will now be dis-
warning messages (컄 page 314). played in order. See the “Practical
hints” section for malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 314).

138
Controls in detail
Control system

Should any malfunctions occur while driv- Settings menu Resetting all settings
ing, the number of malfunctions will reap-
You can reset all the functions of all sub-
pear in the display when the SmartKey in In the Settings menu there are two func-
menus to the factory settings.
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or tions:
removed from the starter switch. 왘 Press the reset button in the instru-
앫 The function Reset to factory set-
ment cluster for approximately three
tings?, with which you can reset all the
i seconds.
settings to the original factory settings.
The message memory will be cleared In the display you will see the request
when you turn the SmartKey in the 앫 A collection of submenus with which
to press the reset button again to con-
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You you can make individual settings for
firm.
will then only see high-priority malfunc- your vehicle.
tions (컄 page 314). 왘 Press the reset button again.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings menu is seen in the The functions of all the submenus will
display. reset to factory settings.

i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. After approximately five seconds,
you will see the Settings... menu
again.

139
Controls in detail
Control system

Submenus in the Settings menu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Resetting the functions of a submenu
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
왘 Press button k or j. For each submenu you can reset all the
with the æ button.
functions to the factory settings.
In the display you see the collection of
Move within the submenus with the k
the submenus. 왘 Move to a function in the submenu.
or j button to the individual functions.
왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 126) in
The settings themselves are made with the instrument cluster for approximate-
button æ or ç. ly three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to con-
firm.
왘 Press button ç.
왘 Press the reset button again.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu. All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.

140
Controls in detail
Control system

The table below shows what settings can


be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE


Select temperature dis- Set time (hours) Set daytime running lamp Set station selection Activate easy-entry/exit
play mode mode (USA only) mode (radio) feature
Select speedometer dis- Set time (minutes) Set locator lighting Set automatic locking Set key-dependency
play mode
Select language Exterior lamps delayed Set opening limiter for Set parking position for
shut-off trunk lid exterior rear view mirror
Select display (speed dis- Interior lighting delayed
play or outside tempera- shut-off
ture) for status display
Select display (speed dis-
play or outside tempera-
ture) for standard display

141
Controls in detail
Control system

Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting speedometer display mode
Access the Instr. cluster submenu via 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. clus- the æ or ç button to the Instr. the æ or ç button to the Instr.
ter submenu to change the instrument cluster submenu. cluster submenu.
cluster display settings. The following
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
functions are available:
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
Function Page play: Temp. indicator. play: Display unit.
Select temperature display 142 The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
mode setting. setting.
Select speedometer display 142
mode
Select language 143
Select display (speed display or 143
outside temperature) for status
display 왘 Press æ or ç to set the temper- 왘 Press æ or ç to set speedome-
Select display (speed display or 144 ature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or de- ter unit to km or miles.
outside temperature) for stan- grees Fahrenheit (°F).
dard display

142
Controls in detail
Control system

Selecting language 왘 Press æ or ç to select the lan- Selecting display (speed display or out-
guage to be used for the multifunction side temperature) for status indicator
왘 Move the selection marker with
display messages.
the æ or ç button to the Instr. 왘 Move the selection marker with
cluster submenu. Available languages: the æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 German
until you see this message in the dis- 앫 English 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
play: Language. until you see this message in the dis-
앫 French play: Status line display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting. 앫 Italian The selection marker is on the current
앫 Spanish setting.

왘 Press æ or ç to select the sta-


tus line to degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
miles

i
You will see the status indicator when
you have called up a different display
from the standard display.

143
Controls in detail
Control system

Selecting display (speed display or out- Time submenu Set time (hours)
side temperature) for standard display
This function is only available in vehicles 왘 Move the selection marker with
왘 Move the selection marker with with audio system. the æ or ç button to the Time
the æ or ç button to the Instr. submenu.
cluster submenu. i
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Vehicles with COMAND*:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the dis-
For information on setting the time, re-
until you see this message in the dis- play: Clock, hours.
fer to the separate COMAND operating
play: Basic display. The selection marker is on the hour set-
instructions.
The selection marker is on the current ting.
setting. Access the Time submenu via the Settings
menu. Use the Time submenu to change
the time display settings. The following
functions are available:
Function Page
Set time (hours) 144 왘 Press æ or ç to set the hour.
왘 Press æ or ç to select the dis- Set time (minutes) 145 왘 Press the reset button in the instru-
play permanently shown in the multi-
ment cluster to confirm.
function display.
The hour is set and stored.

144
Controls in detail
Control system

Set time (minutes) Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘 Move the selection marker with Access the Lighting submenu via the Set-
the æ or ç button to the Time tings menu. Use the Lighting submenu 왘 Move the selection marker with
submenu. to change the lamp and lighting settings on the æ or ç button to the Light-
your vehicle. The following functions are ing submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
available:
until you see this message in the dis- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
play: Clock, minutes. Function Page until you see this message in the dis-
The selection marker is on the minute play: Lamp circuit headlamp.
Set daytime running lamp mode 145
setting. (USA only) The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Set locator lighting 146
Exterior lamps delayed 147
switch-off
Interior lighting delayed 148
switch-off
왘 Press æ or ç to set the minutes.
왘 Press æ or ç to select manual or
왘 Press the reset button in the instru-
daytime running lamp (constant)
ment cluster to confirm.
mode. This function is not available in
The minutes are set and stored. countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory. 컄컄

145
Controls in detail
Control system

컄컄 With daytime running lamp mode se- Setting locator lighting 왘 Move the selection marker with
lected and the exterior lamp switch at the æ or ç button to the Light-
During darkness, the following lamps will
position 0, the following lamps will ning submenu.
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
come on automatically when the en-
in position U, the locator lighting fea- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
gine is turned on:
ture is activated, and the vehicle is un- until you see this message in the dis-
앫 Parking lamps and low beam head- locked with the SmartKey: play: Function Surround lighting.
lamps
앫 Parking lamps The selection marker is on the current
앫 License plate lamps (in low ambient setting.
앫 Tail lamps
light conditions)
앫 License plate lamps
i 앫 Front fog lamps
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding To activate locator lighting:
lamp(s) will switch on. 왘 Make sure the function surround light-
For safety reasons, resetting the ing is set to on, see (컄 page 146). 왘 Press æ or ç to select the de-
Lighting submenu to factory settings 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi- sired setting.
(컄 page 140) while driving will not re- tion U. The locator lighting will be switched on
set the daytime running lamp mode.
The locator lighting switches off when the or off.
In the display you will then see the mes- driver’s door is opened. It switches off au-
sage: Lighting – Cannot be com- tomatically after a period of approximately
pletely reset to factory settings 40 seconds.
while driving.

146
Controls in detail
Control system

Setting night security illumination To activate night security illumination: You can select:
(Exterior lamps delayed shut-off)
왘 Select delayed shut-off period, 앫 0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is
Use the Headlamps delayed shut-off see (컄 page 147). deactivated
function to set whether and for how long
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi- 앫 15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
you would like the exterior lamps to illumi-
tion U. shut-off feature is activated
nate during darkness after all doors are
closed. When the delayed shut-off feature To select delayed shut-off period: You can temporarily deactivate the de-
is activated and the exterior lamp switch is layed shut-off feature:
왘 Move the selection marker with
in position U, the following lamps will the æ or ç button to the Light- 왘 Before leaving the vehicle turn the
remain lit after you remove the SmartKey ing submenu. SmartKey in the starter switch to
from the starter switch: position 0.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 Parking lamps until you see this message in the dis- 왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back
앫 Tail lamps play: Headlamps delayed shut-off. to 0.
앫 License plate lamps The selection marker is on the current The delayed shut-off feature is deacti-
setting. vated. It will reactivate as soon as you
앫 Front fog lamps reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
i switch.
You can reactivate this function within For vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
ten minutes by opening a door. 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
If you do not open a door after remov- ton on the gear selector lever
ing the SmartKey, the lamps will auto- (컄 page 33).
왘 Press æ or ç to select the de-
matically switch off after 60 seconds.
sired lamp-on period.

147
Controls in detail
Control system

Interior lighting delayed shut-off 왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- Setting station selection mode
sired lamp-on time period. You can se-
Use this function to set whether and for Use the Audio Search function to select
lect:
how long you would like the interior light- the manual or memory station selection
ing to remain lit during darkness after the 앫 0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is mode for the radio (컄 page 135).
SmartKey is removed from the starter deactivated.
왘 Move the selection marker with
switch.
앫 5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed the æ or ç button to the Vehi-
왘 Move the selection marker with shut-off feature is activated. cle submenu.
the æ or ç button to the Light- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
ing submenu. Vehicle submenu until you see this message in the dis-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Access the Vehicle submenu via the Set- play: Audio Search function.
until you see this message in the dis- tings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
The selection marker is on the current
play: Interior lamp delayed make general vehicle settings. The follow-
setting.
shut-off. ing functions are available:
The selection marker is on the current Function Page
setting.
Set station selection mode 148
(radio)
Set automatic locking 149
Set opening limiter for trunk lid 149 왘 Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired station selection mode. You can
select:
앫 freq.
앫 memory selects next stored station

148
Controls in detail
Control system

Setting automatic locking Setting trunk lid opening limiter (vehi- Convenience submenu
cles with trunk lid opening/closing sys-
Use this function to activate or deactivate Access the Convenience submenu via the
tem*)
the automatic central locking. With the au- Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub-
tomatic central locking system activated, Use this function to activate or deactivate menu to change the settings for a number
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle the trunk lid opening limiter function. You of convenience features. The following
speeds of approximately 9 mph can also activate or deactivate the opening functions are available:
(15 km/h). height limitation with the trunk lid closing
Function Page
switch, see (컄 page 99).
왘 Move the selection marker with
Activate easy-entry/exit feature 150
the æ or ç button to the Vehi- 왘 Move the selection marker with
cle submenu. the æ or ç button to the Set key-dependency 151
Vehicle submenu. Set parking position for exterior 151
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly rear view mirror
play: Automatic door lock. until you see this message in the dis-
play: Opening limiter Trunk lid.
The selection marker is on the current
setting. The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘 Press æ or ç to switch
Automatic door lock on or off. 왘 Press æ or ç to switch
Opening limiter trunk lid on or off.

149
Controls in detail
Control system

Activating easy-entry/exit feature After entering the vehicle, the steering


Use this function to activate and deacti-
Warning! G wheel and seat will move into the position
stored in memory when
vate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the You must make sure no one can become
feature is activated, the steering wheel and 앫 the driver’s door is closed.
trapped or injured by the moving steering
driver’s seat will move back to facilitate ex- wheel and the driver’s seat when the 앫 you put the SmartKey in the starter
iting when you easy-entry/exit feature is in operation and switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter the driver’s door is being opened or the start/stop button.
switch SmartKey is removed from the starter
앫 press the appropriate stored position
switch.
앫 open the driver’s door button on the memory switch
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- (컄 page 116).
However, the engine must be turned off.
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and i
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit To cancel seat/steering wheel move-
feature, which could result in an accident ment, do one of the following:
and/or serious personal injury.
앫 Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 35)
앫 Move the steering column stalk
(컄 page 38)
앫 Press the memory switch
(컄 page 116)

150
Controls in detail
Control system

왘 Move the selection marker with off The easy-entry/ex-


the æ or ç button to it feature is deacti-
the Convenience submenu. vated.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Steering col. Only the steering
until you see this message in the dis- column is moved.
play: Function Easy-entry feature.
Steer. col. + seat Both the steering
The selection marker is on the current 왘 Press æ or ç to set key-depen-
column and the
setting. dency to on or off.
seat are moved.
Setting parking position for exterior rear
Setting key-dependency view mirror
Use this function to set whether the mem- Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid
ory settings for the seats, the steering function to select whether the passen-
wheel and the mirrors should be stored ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
separately for each SmartKey or SmartKey turned downward during parking maneu-
왘 Press æ or ç to change the with KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 116). vers when reverse gear R is engaged. For
easy-entry/exit setting.
왘 Move the selection marker with additional information, see “Activating ex-
The following settings are available for the æ or ç button to terior rear view mirror parking position”
the easy-entry/exit feature: the Convenience submenu. (컄 page 168).
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play: Key-dependent.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

151
Controls in detail
Control system

왘 Move the selection marker to Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics after start
the Convenience submenu using
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
the æ or ç button. Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
until you see the first function of the
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Trip computer menu.
information is available:
until you see this message in the dis-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
play: Mirror adjustment parking aid. Function Page until you see this message in the left
The selection marker is on the current Fuel consumption statistics after 152 display: After start.
setting. start
Fuel consumption statistics 153
since last reset
Call up range (distance to empty) 153

1 Distance driven since start


왘 Press æ or ç to switch function 2 Time elapsed since start
on or off. 3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start

152
Controls in detail
Control system

i Call up range (distance to empty)


All statistics stored since the last en- 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
gine start will be reset approximately until you see the first function of the
four hours after the SmartKey in the Trip computer menu.
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
removed from the starter switch.
until you see this message in the dis-
Resetting will not occur if you turn the 1 Distance driven since last reset
play: Range.
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 with- 2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset In the display you will see the calculat-
in this time period.
4 Average fuel consumption since last re- ed range based on the current fuel tank
set level.
Fuel consumption since last reset
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly Resetting fuel consumption statistics
until you see the first function of the
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
Trip computer menu.
until you see the first function of the
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Trip computer menu.
until you see this message in the dis-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
play: After reset.
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 126) until
the value is reset to 0.

153
Controls in detail
Control system

TEL menu* Which messages will appear in the display


Never operate radio transmitters equipped
field depends on whether your telephone is
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
switched on or off:
Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is 앫 If the telephone is off, the message in
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- the multifunction display is: Tel off.
A driver’s attention to the road must always
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
be his/her primary focus when driving. For 앫 If the telephone is on:
sibly resulting in an accident and ⁄or
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
personal injury. The telephone will then search for a
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
network. During this time the display is
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
You can use the functions in the Tel menu empty.
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
phone while driving, please use the to operate your telephone, provided it is As soon as the telephone has found a
hands-free device and only use the tele- connected to a hands-free system and network, READY is indicated in the dis-
phone when weather, road and traffic condi- switched on. play.
tions permit. 왘 Switch on the telephone and Audio or
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from COMAND*.
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve- 왘 Press button ÿ or è on the
hicle. steering wheel repeatedly until you see
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph the Tel menu in the display.
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately 1 Signal strength
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec- This standby message indicates that your
ond. telephone is ready for use and you can op-
erate it using the control system.

154
Controls in detail
Control system

i Answering a call Ending a call


Vehicles with Audio system: When your telephone is ready to receive 왘 Press button ì.
The signal strength is indicated in the calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
You have ended the call. In the display
top right corner, for example “S9”. The the display you will then see the message:
you will again see the standby mes-
higher the number, the stronger the
sage.
signal from the cellular network.
Vehicles with COMAND*: Dialing a number from the phone book
The signal strength is indicated by bars
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
in the top left corner. The higher the
you may select and dial a number from the
number of bars, the stronger the signal
phone book at any time.
from the cellular network. 왘 Press button í.
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
You have answered the call. In the dis- until you see the Tel menu in the dis-
play you see the length of the call. play.
i 왘 Press button j or k.
If you do not wish to accept a call, The control system reads the phone
press button ì. book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
Please wait.
When the message Please wait disap-
pears, the phone book has been load-
ed. 컄컄

155
Controls in detail
Control system

컄컄왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button í. Redialing


until the desired name appears in the
The system dials the selected phone The control system stores the most recent-
display.
number. ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
The stored names are displayed in as- the need to search through your entire
앫 If the connection is successful, the
cending or descending alphabetical or- phone book.
name of the party you called and
der.
the duration of the call will appear 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
i in the display. until you see the Tel menu in the dis-
play.
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system 왘 Press button í.
scrolls rapidly through the list of names In the display you see the first number
until you release the button again. in the redial memory.
Cancel the quick search mode by 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
pressing ì. until the desired name appears in the
앫 If no connection is made, the con-
trol system stores the dialed num- display.
ber in the redial memory.
i
If you do not want to use the telephone,
press button ì.

왘 Press button í.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.

156
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
Information on driving with an automatic The automatic transmission selects indi-
transmission is found in the “Getting vidual gears automatically, depending on: Warning! G
started” section (컄 page 44).
앫 the gear selector lever position D with It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 159) lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
shifting process to your individual driving
앫 the selected shift program higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
style by continually adjusting the shift
(C/S) (컄 page 163) firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
points up or down. These shift point adjust- accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
ments are performed based on current or
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
operating and driving conditions. (C/S/M) (CLK 55 AMG only) someone or something. Only shift into gear
If the operating conditions change, the (컄 page 164) when the engine is idling normally and when
automatic transmission reacts by 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
adjusting its gear shift program. (컄 page 163)

When the gear selector lever is in
i the vehicle speed
position D, you can influence transmission
During the brief warm-up, transmission The current gear selector lever position shifting by
upshifting is delayed. This allows the and shift program (C/S) or (C/S/ M) appear
catalytic converter to heat up more 앫 limiting the gear range
in the multifunction display (컄 page 129).
quickly to operating temperature. 앫 changing gears manually
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate. The indicators
come on when you activate a switch (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door)
and go out after approximately
15 minutes.

157
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

One-touch gearshifting i Canceling gear range limit


To avoid overrevving the engine when 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
Even with an automatic transmission you
the gear selector lever is moved to in the D+ direction until D reappears in
can change the gears manually when the
the D– direction, the transmission will the multifunction display.
gear selector lever is in position D.
not shift to a lower gear if the engine's
The transmission will shift from the current
max. speed would be exceeded.
Downshifting gear range directly to gear range D.
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to Upshifting Shifting into optimal gear range
the left in the D– direction.
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
The transmission will shift from the current the right in the D+ direction. in the D– direction.
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the The transmission will shift from the current The transmission will automatically select
transmission (컄 page 159). gear to the next higher gear as permitted the gear range suited for optimal
by the shift program. This action simul- acceleration and deceleration. This will
taneously extends the gear range of the involve shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G transmission.

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift


in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.

158
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Gear ranges The selected gear range appears in the Effect


multifunction display. If you press on the
With the gear selector lever in position D, accelerator when the engine has reached ç The transmission shifts through
you can limit the transmission’s gear range its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift second gear only.
by pressing the gear selector lever to the beyond any gear range limit selected. Allows the use of engine’s
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit braking power when driving:
by pressing the gear selector lever to the Effect
앫 on steep downgrades
right (D+). é The transmission shifts through
앫 in mountainous regions
fourth gear only.
è The transmission shifts through 앫 under extreme operating
third gear only. conditions

With this selection you can use æ The transmission operates only
the braking effect of the engine. in first gear.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.

159
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Gear selector lever position Effect Effect


The SmartKey can only be ë Neutral
Effect removed from the starter switch
No power is transmitted from the
ì Park position with the gear selector lever in
engine to the drive axle. When
position P. With the SmartKey
Gear selector lever position the brakes are released, the
removed, the gear selector lever
when the vehicle is parked. Place vehicle can be moved freely
is locked in position P.
gear selector lever in position P (pushed or towed).
only when vehicle is stopped. If the vehicle’s electrical system To avoid damage to the trans-
The park position is not intended is malfunctioning, the gear mission, never engage N while
to serve as a brake when the selector lever could remain driving.
vehicle is parked. Rather, the locked in position P
driver should always set the (컄 page 347). If the ESP is deactivated or
parking brake in addition to malfunctioning:
í Reverse gear
placing the gear selector lever in Move gear selector lever to N
position P to secure the vehicle. Place gear selector lever in only if the vehicle is in danger of
position R only when vehicle is skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
stopped. ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.

160
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

! Steering wheel gearshift control


Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any Warning! G (Speedshift) CLK 55 AMG
other reason with gear selector lever
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the In the manual shift program mode you can
in N can result in transmission damage
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the change the gears manually on the steering
that is not covered by the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and wheel or by using the gear selector lever
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- (컄 page 158).
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
Allow engine to warm up under low load
Warning! G unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from position P, which
use. Do not place full load on the engine
until the operating temperature has been
could result in an accident and/or serious
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
personal injury.
selector lever not fully engaged in position P the vehicle is stopped.
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your !
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
or objects. extended period when driving off on
Always set the parking brake in addition to
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
shifting to position P (컄 page 46).
serious damage to the drive train which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
When parked on an incline, turn the front Limited Warranty.
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as gras, hay, or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

161
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

The steering wheel gearshift buttons are Downshifting Upshifting


located to the left and right of the steering
왘 Press button 2 on the left side of the 왘 Press button 3 on the right side of the
wheel.
steering wheel. steering wheel.
When driving in the manual program mode When driving in the manual program mode
(컄 page 164), the transmission will shift (컄 page 164), the transmission will shift
from the current gear to the next lower from the current gear to the next higher
gear (컄 page 165). gear (컄 page 165).

i
Warning! G You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
1 Shift button result in drive wheel slip and reduced
2 Left button: downshift vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
3 Right button: upshift prevent this type of loss of control.

i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.

162
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Program mode selector switch 왘 Press the program mode selector Accelerator position
switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
The program mode selector switch is the desired shift program appears in Your driving style influences the
located on the lower part of the center the multifunction display (컄 page 129). transmission’s shifting behavior:
console.
Select C for comfort driving: Less throttle Earlier upshifting
앫 The vehicle starts out in second More throttle Later upshifting
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if Kickdown
full throttle is applied or gear Use kickdown when you want maximum
range 1 is selected. acceleration.
앫 Traction and driving stability are 왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
improved on icy roads. resistance.
앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when The transmission shifts into a lower
1 Program mode selector switch you give more gas. The engine then gear.
operates at lower rpms and the
S Sport For standard driving wheels are less likely to spin. 왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
C Comfort For comfort driving 앫 The power transmission ratio for
gear selector lever position R The transmission shifts up again.
!
changes depending on the program
Never change the program mode when mode selected (S or C).
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.

163
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Manual shift program CLK 55 AMG Program mode selector switch Activating manual shift program
The program mode selector switch is 왘 Press program mode selector
In the manual shift program mode you can
located on the lower part of the center switch 1 repeatedly until the M for
change the gears manually on the steering
console. manual shift program appears in the
wheel (컄 page 161) or by using the gear
multifunction display.
selector lever (컄 page 158).
The program mode switches to manual
Allow engine to warm up under low load
program mode M. Automatic shifting is
use. Do not place full load on the engine
switched off. The gear range is not
until the operating temperature has been
limited.
reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
the vehicle is stopped. You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in position D. You
! can upshift or downshift through the gears
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an in succession.
extended period when driving off on 1 Program mode selector switch The current gear selector lever position
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
S Sport For standard driving and the selected shift program (C/S/M) is
serious damage to the drive train which
indicated in the multifunction display
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz C Comfort For comfort driving (컄 page 129).
Limited Warranty.
M Manual For manual gear shifting
The selected shift program (C/S/M) is
indicated in the multifunction display
(컄 page 129).

164
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Downshifting 왘 Press button 3 on the right side of the Emergency operation (Limp Home
steering wheel (컄 page 161). Mode)
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction The transmission shifts to the next
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
(컄 page 158). higher gear.
transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
or mission is most likely operating in limp
Deactivating manual shift program
왘 Press button 2 on the left side of the home (emergency operation) mode. In this
왘 Press the program mode selector mode, only second gear and reverse gear
steering wheel (컄 page 161).
switch repeatedly until S or C appears can be activated.
The transmission shifts to the next in the right multifunction display field.
왘 Stop the vehicle.
lower gear.
or
왘 Move gear selector lever to P.
Warning! G 왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Turn off the engine.
The transmission will go into the last
왘 Wait at least ten seconds before
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift shift program mode selected (S or C).
restarting.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
Program mode M is not stored.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced 왘 Restart the engine.
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not i 왘 Move gear selector lever to position D
prevent this type of loss of control. (for second gear) or R.
The last selected automatic program
mode (S or C) is switched on when the 왘 Have the transmission checked at an
Upshifting engine is restarted in the automatic authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to program mode. soon as possible.
the right in the D+ direction
(컄 page 158).
or

165
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
Windshield wipers ! Headlamp cleaning system*
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
More information on the windshield wipers mittent setting when the vehicle is tak- The switch is located on the left side of the
can be found in the “Getting started” sec- en to an automatic car wash or during dashboard.
tion (컄 page 48). windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper-
i ate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
damaged as a result.
the vehicle is at a standstill and a door
is opened. The switch should not be left in inter-
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
A rain sensor automatically controls the the windshield once every time the en-
windshield wipers depending on how wet gine is started. Dust that accumulates
the windshield is. on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades 1 Headlamp washer switch
왘 Switch ignition on. when wiping occurs on a dry wind-
shield. 왘 Switch on ignition.
왘 Set the wiper switch to position I
(컄 page 49). 왘 Press switch 1.
After the initial wipe, pauses between The headlamps are cleaned with a
wipes are automatically controlled by the high-pressure water jet.
rain sensor.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 394).

166
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Rear view mirror


Warning! G Warning! G
More information on setting the rear view
mirrors can be found in the “Getting start- The automatic antiglare function does not Exercise care when using the passenger
ed” section (컄 page 38). react if incoming light is not aimed directly side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not are closer than they appear. Check your in-
The reflection brightness of the exterior
react, for example, if the rear window sun terior rear view mirror or glance over your
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
shade* is in raised position. shoulder before changing lanes.
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when Glare can endanger you and others.
!
앫 the ignition is switched on,
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
and
Warning! G with the vehicle paint finish can be
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on completely removed only while in the
the sensor in the interior rear view mir- In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte liquid state by applying plenty of water.
ror. may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
The rear view mirror will not react if
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
앫 reverse gear is engaged
low the liquid to come into contact with
앫 the interior lighting is turned on eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.

167
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Activating exterior rear view mirror The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
parking position previously stored driving position:
Follow these steps to activate the mirror 앫 ten seconds after you put the gear se-
parking position so that the passen- lector lever out of position R
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds
turned downward to the stored position.
a speed of approximately 6 mph
왘 Make sure you have stored a parking (10 km/h)
position for the passenger-side exterior 앫 immediately when you press button 3
rear view mirror (컄 page 118). for driver’s side mirror.
왘 Make sure the Mirror adjustment 1 Adjustment button
parking aid function in the 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
Convenience submenu of the control mirror button
system is switched to on (컄 page 151). 3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
왘 Switch on ignition (if not already on).
왘 Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.

168
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Sun visors

The sun visors protect you from sun glare


while driving.

Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare 1 Mounting If sunlight enters through a side window:
can endanger you and others. 2 Sun visor
왘 disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
3 Mirror cover
왘 Swing sun visors down when you expe- 4 Mirror lamp 왘 pivot sun visor to the side.
rience glare. The sun visors are extendable.
왘 To use mirror, lift up cover 3.
왘 Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in the direction of the arrow.

i
If you disengage the sun visor from
mounting 1, mirror lamp 4 will
switch off.

169
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Rear window sunshade*


Warning! G Warning! G
The switch is located in the center console.
When operating the rear window sunshade, When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
make sure there is no danger of anyone be- SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
dure. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
The raising or lowering procedure can be im- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
mediately halted by briefly pressing the up- unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
per or lower half of the switch. cle equipment may cause an accident and⁄or
serious personal injury.
Briefly press upper or lower half of the
switch again to raise or lower the rear win-
dow sunshade completely.
왘 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch po-
sition 1 or 2. Vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*: press the start/stop
button once or twice.
왘 Press the switch briefly at 1 to raise
the sunshade.
왘 Press the switch briefly at 2 to lower
the sunshade.
Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup-
port against the window frame.

170
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Rear window defroster Activating


왘 Press button F (컄 page 173).
Warning! G
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep battery drain to The indicator lamp on the button Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
a minimum, switch off the defroster as comes on. removed from the rear window before driv-
soon as the rear window is clear. The de- ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
froster is automatically deactivated after Deactivating endangering you and others.
approximately 6 to 17 minutes of opera- 왘 Press button F (컄 page 173) again.
tion depending on the outside tempera- !
ture. The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operat-
ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
cient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
automatically switches on again.

171
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
왔 Automatic climate control

172
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Item Item
1 Left side air vent, adjustable 1 Temperature control, left, lowering
2 Left center air vent, adjustable 2 Temperature control, left, raising
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control 3 Left-side air distribution
for center air vents (automatic or manual operation)
4 Right center air vent, adjustable 4 Activated charcoal filter
5 Right side air vent, adjustable 5 Display
6 Automatic climate control panel 6 Right-side air distribution
Automatic climate control panel (automatic or manual operation)
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side center air vent 7 Temperature control, right, raising
8 Thumbwheel for lowering tempera- 8 Temperature control, right,
ture, center and side air vents lowering
9 Thumbwheel for air volume control 9 Rear window defroster
for left side center air vent a AC cooling on/off °
Residual heat/ventilation
i
b Air volume control
For draft-free ventilation, move the slid-
ers for the center air vents 1, 2, 4, c Automatic climate control on/off
5 to the middle position. (complete system)
d Air recirculation
e Defrosting

173
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

The automatic climate control is operation- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i
al whenever the engine is running. You can odors are filtered out before outside air en- Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
operate the climate control system in ei- ters the passenger compartment through tion) may require replacement of the fil-
ther the automatic or manual mode. The the air distribution system. ter before its scheduled interval. A
system cools or heats the interior depend- clogged filter will reduce the air volume
The air conditioning will not engage (no
ing on the selected interior temperature to the interior.
cooling) if the ° mode is selected
and the current outside temperature.
(컄 page 181). If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Warning G Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the
When operating the automatic climate con- windshield free of snow and debris.
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
partment through the air vents in the jects on the air flow-through exhaust
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
footwell can be very hot or very cold (de- slots below the rear window.
impairing visibility and endangering you and
pending on the set temperature). This may
others.
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Al-
ways keep sufficient distance between un-
protected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
(컄 page 176).

174
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Setting the temperature Increasing Adding outside air


왘 Push temperature control 2 왘 Turn thumbwheel 8 in dashboard
Use temperature controls (컄 page 173) 1
and/or 7. (컄 page 172) to increase flow of out-
and 2 for the left side or 7 and 8 for
side air through air vents for center, left
the right side to separately adjust the air The automatic climate control system
and right sides, as well as dashboard
temperature on each side of the passenger will correspondingly adjust the interior
top center and rear passenger com-
compartment. You should raise or lower air temperature.
partment.
the temperature setting in small incre-
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). Decreasing
왘 Push temperature control 1
i
and/or 8.
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will The automatic climate control system
only rarely need to adjust the tempera- will correspondingly adjust the interior
ture, air volume and air distribution. air temperature.

175
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Adjusting air distribution Adjusting manually Windshield fogged on the outside


왘 Press left or right U button. 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on, see
Use the air distribution controls 7 and 9
“Windshield wipers” (컄 page 48).
(컄 page 172) to separately adjust the air The U pops out, the a, Z,
distribution on each side of the passenger X and Y symbols are visible. 왘 Switch to manual mode.
compartment. The following symbols are Air distribution can be adjusted manu- 왘 Close the air vent at dashboard top
found on the controls: ally. center.
Symbol Function 왘 Turn the air distribution control
Adjusting automatically
to a or Y.
a Directs air through the center,
왘 Press left or right U button again.
side and rear passenger com-
partment air vents The a, Z, X and Y sym-
Z Directs air to the windows bols are no longer visible.

X Directs air into the entire vehi- The air distribution is adjusted auto-
cle interior matically.
Y Directs air to the footwells

176
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Adjusting air volume Maximum cooling MAXCOOL Defrosting

If the left and right air distribution controls i


Adjusting manually as well as the airflow volume control are
These settings should only be selected
Seven blower speeds are available. set to U and there is a high need for
for a short time.
cooling, the display “MAXCOOL” appears.
왘 Press left M or right Q side of air
volume control switch until the re- This provides the fastest possible cooling Activating
quested blower speed is attained. of the vehicle interior (when windows and
sliding/pop-up roof are closed). 왘 Press button P (컄 page 173).
The display “AUTO” disappears and the
automatic mode is switched off. The The indicator lamp on the button
selected blower speed is shown in the comes on.
display. Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
왘 Press button , (컄 page 173).
Adjusting automatically
The indicator lamp on the button goes
왘 Press left or right U button until it
out.
clicks in.
왘 Close center air vents.
The a, Z, X and Y sym-
bols are no longer visible. 왘 Adjust side air vents upwards.
The air volume is adjusted
Deactivating
automatically.
왘 Press button P (컄 page 173).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.

177
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Air recirculation mode i i


If you keep button , pressed, the The air recirculation mode is activated
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
side windows and the sliding/pop-up automatically:
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
roof* will close. 앫 at high outside temperatures
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the 앫 if the concentration of carbon mon-
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning G oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out-
side air increases, for example in a
Warning! G Never operate the side windows and the tunnel
sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibil- Please note that the charcoal filter
When the outside temperature is below ity of anyone being harmed by the closing must be activated (컄 page 179) for the
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation procedure. air recirculation mode to be activated
mode for short periods to prevent window In the event that the procedure causes po- automatically.
fogging. tential danger, the closing of the side win-
If you have turned off the air condition-
dows can be immediately halted by
ing system (컄 page 181) or the outside
Activating releasing the , button or by pressing or
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
왘 Press button , (컄 page 173). pulling the respective window switch. The
air recirculation mode will not switch
closing of the sliding/pop-up roof* can be
The indicator lamp on the button on automatically.
immediately halted by releasing the ,
comes on. button or by moving the sliding/pop-up
roof* switch in the overhead control panel in
any direction.

178
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Deactivating i Charcoal filter


왘 Press button , (컄 page 173). The air recirculation mode is deactivat-
An activated charcoal filter markedly re-
ed automatically:
The indicator lamp on the button goes duces bad odors and removes pollutants
out. 앫 after five minutes if the outside from air entering the passenger compart-
temperature is below ment.
i approximately 41°F (5°C)
If you keep button , pressed, the Activating
앫 after five minutes if the air condi-
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
tioning is turned off 왘 Press button e (컄 page 173).
roof* will return to their previous
position. 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside tem- The indicator lamp on the button
perature is above approximately comes on.
41°F (5°C)
i
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatical- If you keep button e pressed, the
ly switch back to outside air. A quantity side windows and the sliding/pop-up
of outside air is added after approxi- roof* will close.
mately 30 minutes.

179
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

i Deactivating the climate control


Warning G If you keep button e pressed, the system
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
Never operate the side windows and the
roof* will return to their previous Deactivating
sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibil-
position.
ity of anyone being harmed by the closing It is possible to deactivate the automatic
procedure. climate control system.
The system switches automatically to the
In the event that the procedure causes po-
air recirculation mode if the carbon 왘 Press button M (컄 page 173) until
tential danger, the closing of the side win- the display is cleared.
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
dows can be immediately halted by
concentration of the outside air increases The climate control system is deacti-
releasing the e button or by pressing or
beyond a predetermined level. vated.
pulling the respective window switch. The
closing of the sliding/pop-up roof* can be The automatic air recirculation mode does
immediately halted by releasing the e not function if economy mode ° is se- Reactivating
button or by moving the sliding/pop-up lected or if the outside temperature has 왘 Press button Q (컄 page 173).
roof* switch in the overhead control panel in fallen below 41°F (5°C).
any direction. The activated charcoal filter should be
i
switched off when windows fog up on the When the automatic climate control
Deactivating inside, or if the passenger compartment system is deactivated, the air flow and
needs to be quickly heated or cooled circulation are also switched off.
왘 Press button e (컄 page 173). Only choose this setting temporarily to
down.
The indicator lamp on the button goes prevent the windows from fogging up.
out.

180
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Air conditioning Activating Residual heat and ventilation*


Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The air conditioning is operational while With the engine switched off, it is possible
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
the engine is running and cools the interior to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
ing.
air to the temperature set by the operator. for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
왘 Press ° again (컄 page 173). use of the residual heat produced by the
i engine.
The indicator lamp on the button °
Condensation may drip out from under-
goes out.
neath the vehicle. This is normal and Activating
not an indication of a malfunction. The air conditioning system uses the refrig-
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
erant R134a. This refrigerant is free of
CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the
Deactivating starter switch.
It is possible to deactivate the air condi- ! 왘 Press button ° (컄 page 173).
tioning (cooling) function of the automatic If the ° button on the automatic cli-
climate control system. The air in the vehi- mate control panel starts to flash, this The indicator lamp on button °
cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu- indicates that the air conditioning sys- comes on.
midified. tem is losing refrigerant. The compres-
왘 Press button ° (컄 page 173). sor has turned itself off. The air
conditioning cannot be turned on
The indicator lamp on the button ° again.
comes on.
Have the air conditioning system
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

181
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Deactivating Rear passenger compartment adjust- i


able air vents The booster blower allows airflow
왘 Press button ° (컄 page 173).
speed to the rear passenger compart-
The indicator lamp on button °
ment to be increased at four different
goes out.
levels.
The residual heat is automatically turned
The temperature at the air vents for
off:
rear passenger compartment 2
앫 when the ignition is switched on and 3 is the same as at the dashboard
앫 after about 30 minutes center air vents.

앫 if the battery voltage drops

i 1 Thumbwheel for center air vents with


How long the system will provide heat- adjustable booster blower
ing depends on the coolant tempera- 2 Left center air vent
ture and the temperature set by the 3 Right center air vent
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu- To open center air vents and to adjust the
tion control setting. booster blower:
왘 Turn thumbwheel 1.

182
Controls in detail
Audio system
왔 Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation Operating safety

These instructions are intended to help


you become familiar with your Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They con-
tain useful tips and a detailed description Any alterations made to electronic compo-
of the user functions. nents can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
Warning! G radio*, telephone* and voice control sys-
tem* are interconnected. When one of the
In order to avoid distraction which could components is not operational or has not
lead to an accident, the driver should enter been removed/replaced properly, the func-
system settings with the vehicle at a stand- tion of other components may be impaired.
still and operate the system only when road This condition might seriously impair the
and traffic conditions permit. Always pay full operating safety of your vehicle.
attention to traffic conditions first before
We recommend that you have any service
operating system controls while driving.
work on electronic components carried out
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is cover-
ing a distance of 50 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.

183
Controls in detail
Audio system

Operating and display elements

184
Controls in detail
Audio system

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 CD mode selector 199 5 Alpha-numeric keypad 9 Function keys
2 Manual tuning 189 Band selection, 189 a Cassette eject 197
(radio) station buttons (radio) b Cassette mode selector 196
Fast forward/reverse 198, CD selection (CD) 201 c Telephone* mode selector 203
(cassette, CD) 202 Telephone number entry, 204 d Seek tuning (radio) 190
Speed dialing memory 207 retrieving speed dialing
(telephone*) memory (telephone) Track search (cassette, 197,
CD) 202
3 Radio mode selector 189 6 Scanning (radio, cassette, 191,
CD) 198, Speed dialing memory 207
4 Display panel (telephone)
202
Cassette compartment e On/off 186
behind display panel 7 Function button 190
8 Light-emitting diode Volume 186

185
Controls in detail
Audio system

Button and soft key operation Operation Adjusting the volume


왘 Turn control knob a.
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the Switching on/off The volume will increase or decrease
function buttons (left side of radio panel) Switching on: depending on the direction turned.
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch to i
below the display panel are referred to as
position 1 or 2.
“soft keys”. The volume setting can be selected
or separately for the telephone*, audio
! system and voice control system*.
왘 Turn control knob a.
Do not press directly on the display
face. Otherwise, the display will be i Adjusting audio functions
damaged. If the radio is switched on without the Press the AUD key to call up the bass, tre-
SmartKey in the starter switch, it will ble, balance and fader functions in the var-
automatically switch off again after ap- ious operating modes. Settings for bass
prox. 30 minutes. and treble are stored separately for the AM
and FM frequency bands, satellite radio
Switching off: (SAT) mode, cassette mode and CD mode.
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
or
왘 Turn control knob a.

186
Controls in detail
Audio system

Bass Treble Fader


왘 Regardless of operating mode, press 왘 Regardless of operating mode, press i
the AUD key repeatedly until BASS the AUD key repeatedly until TREBLE
Your vehicle may or may not have the
appears on the display. appears on the display.
fader function, depending on the
vehicle equipment and model.

왘 Regardless of operating mode, press


the AUD key repeatedly until FADER
appears on the display.

왘 Press + or - key to increase or de- 왘 Press + or - key to increase or


crease level. decrease level.
or or
왘 Press both + and - keys simultaneously 왘 Press both + and - keys simultaneously
to reset the Bass to its center (flat) lev- to reset the Treble to its center (flat)
el. level. 왘 Press F or R key to shift sound accord-
ingly to the front or rear speakers.
or
왘 Press both F and R keys simultaneously
to reset the Fader to its center level.

187
Controls in detail
Audio system

Balance Returning audio functions to factory Audio system sound selection (EXT)*
settings
왘 Regardless of operating mode, press 왘 Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until BALANCE the AUD key.
appears on the display.
The sound settings menu appears on
the display.
왘 Press the EXT key.

왘 Regardless of operating mode, press


and hold AUD key longer than two
seconds. RESET will appear on the
왘 Press L or R key to shift sound accord-
display.
ingly to the left or right speakers.
All settings for bass, treble and balance
or 왘 Press one of the function keys.
are returned to the center level and the
왘 Press both L and R keys simultaneously volume is set to a predefined level.
to reset the Balance to its center level.

188
Controls in detail
Audio system

You can select from among the Radio operation 왘 Press FM, AM or WB key repeatedly un-
following settings: til desired band has been selected.
앫 DRV: The tone level is set to the Selecting radio mode The FM, AM and WB frequency bands
Driver position; sound is directed are called up one after the other.
왘 Press b button.
toward the passengers.
The frequency band currently selected
왘 You can now receive radio stations
앫 SP: The tone level is set for Speech, appears in the upper left-hand corner
over the analog FM, AM or WB station
optimizing the sound for the spoken of the display.
frequencies or you can receive chan-
word.
nels digitally via satellite radio (SAT)*.
앫 AMB: The tone level is set for
Selecting a station
Ambience, producing a Analog station frequencies The following options are available for
three-dimensional sound. selecting a station:
앫 OFF: The audio system sound Selecting the band 앫 Direct frequency band input
selection is turned off. You can select from among FM, AM or WB (컄 page 190)
frequency bands. 앫 Manual tuning (컄 page 190)
Telephone* muting
Weather band (컄 see page 192). 앫 Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 190)
If a telephone has been installed in the
vehicle, the radio will switch to telephone i 앫 Scan tuning (컄 page 191)
mode when a call is incoming. The current FM frequency band: 앫 Preset buttons (컄 page 191)
audio source is muted. FM 87.7......107.9 MHz
앫 Automatic station memory (Autostore)
AM frequency band: (컄 page 191)
MW (medium wave) 530......1710 KHz

189
Controls in detail
Audio system

Direct frequency input Manual tuning Automatic seek tuning


Select the desired frequency band. 왘 Select the desired frequency band. 왘 Select the desired frequency band.

왘 Press “ button. 왘 Press and hold either the d or c 왘 Press either the f or e button.
button until the desired frequency is
왘 Enter desired frequency using The radio will tune to the next higher or
reached.
buttons 4 to M. next lower receivable frequency.
Step-by-step station tuning takes place
i in ascending or descending order of
You can only enter frequencies within frequency. The first three tuning steps
the respective waveband. will take place without muting. After-
If a button is not pressed within four wards, the radio will be muted and
seconds, the radio will return to the highspeed tuning will take place until
station last tuned to. the button is released.

190
Controls in detail
Audio system

Scan tuning Manual station memory (Presets) Automatic station memory (Autostore)
앫 Starting scan tuning You can store ten AM and ten FM stations. The Autostore memory function provides
an additional memory level. The station
왘 Select desired frequency band. 앫 Storing stations
memory for manually stored stations is not
왘 Tune in the desired station. overwritten.
왘 Press and hold desired station 앫 Calling up Autostore memory level
button 4 to M until a brief
왘 Briefly press the AS key.
signal tone is heard.
AS is highlighted in the display.

왘 Press 2 button. The radio finds the ten stations with


the strongest signals. These
SC will appear on the display. The stations are stored on the station
radio briefly tunes in all receivable buttons 4 to M in order of
stations on the band selected. The signal strength.
first scan cycle will tune in only the
The frequency is stored on the 앫 Retrieving a station from memory
stations with a strong signal. The
selected station button.
second scan cycle will tune in every 왘 Press desired station button 4
receivable station. The frequency band and station to M.
button number are shown in the up-
앫 Ending scan tuning 앫 Leaving the Autostore memory level
per left-hand corner of the display.
왘 Press 2 button or d, c, 앫 Retrieving a station from memory 왘 Press the AS key.
f or e button.
왘 Press desired station button 4 The highlighted AS in the display
SC disappears from the display. disappears.
to M.

191
Controls in detail
Audio system

Weather band Satellite radio (SAT)* (USA only) Sirius Satellite Radio provides 100 chan-
nels of digital-quality radio, among others
i music, sports, news, and entertainment,
Additional optional satellite radio free of commercials. Sirius Satellite Radio
equipment and a subscription to satel- uses a fleet of high-power satellites to
lite radio service provider is required broadcast 24 hours per day
for the satellite radio operation de- coast-to-coast.
왘 Press the WB key. scribed here. Feature description is This diverse, satellite-delivered program-
based on preliminary information avail- ming is available for a monthly subscrip-
The weather band station last selected
able at time of printing. tion fee.
is tuned in.
At time of printing, no date for availabil- For more information, call the Sirius ser-
왘 Select the desired weather band vice or contact www.siriusradio.com
ity of optional equipment required for
station with buttons 4 to 7.
satellite radio operation had been set.
If a station cannot be tuned in, a scan Contact your authorized Program categories
is automatically started. Mercedes-Benz Center for details and The channels are categorized. The catego-
왘 Press f or e button. The next availability for your vehicle. ries allow you to tune to stations broad-
receivable weather band station is Satellite radio service may be unavail- casting a certain type of program
tuned in. able or interrupted from time to time (PTY mode) (컄 page 195).
for a variety of reasons, such as envi-
ronmental or topographic conditions
and other things we can't control. Ser-
vice might also not be available in cer-
tain places (e.g., in tunnels, parking
garages, or within or next to buildings)
or near other technologies.

192
Controls in detail
Audio system

Starting satellite radio (SAT) Entering the Electronic Serial Number 왘 Press the ESN key repeatedly until all
(ESN) required information has appeared on
왘 Start radio mode.
the display.
The first time SAT radio is called up, you
If the radio was in SAT radio mode be-
must give your SAT radio provider the Elec- 왘 Call the telephone number and give
fore being turned off or changed to an-
tronic Serial Number (ESN) of your SAT re- provider your ESN number.
other operating mode, the last SAT
ceiver over the telephone.
channel selected is called up. i
왘 Press the SAT key.
or Credit card information is also required
The radio switches to SAT mode. for your application.
왘 Press the SAT key.
CALL SIRI appears on the display.
When you call up the SAT radio mode The activation process takes approxi-
for the first time, ACQUIRING will appear mately five to ten minutes after calling
on the display during the initialization the SIRIUS Service Center.
process.
or

왘 Press the ESN key.


The provider’s phone number will ap-
pear first. After pressing the ESN key
again, the ESN number will appear.
Make note of the phone number and
The last channel selected is called up. ESN number.

193
Controls in detail
Audio system

Channel selection i 앫 Storing channels


The following options are available for se- Only inputs for available channels are 왘 Tune in the desired channel.
lecting a channel: possible.
왘 Press and hold desired channel but-
앫 Direct channel input (컄 page 194) If a button is not pressed within four ton 4 to M until a brief signal
seconds, the radio will return to the last tone sounds.
앫 Manual tuning (컄 page 194)
station tuned.
앫 Preset channels (컄 page 194)
Manual tuning
Direct channel input
왘 Press and hold f, d, c or
e button until the desired channel
has been reached.
The channel is stored on the selected
Preset channels channel button.
You can store up to ten channels.
왘 Press “ key. 앫 Retrieving a channel from memory
왘 Enter desired channel number using 왘 Press the desired channel button
buttons 4 to M. 4 to M.

194
Controls in detail
Audio system

Program type (PTY) mode Selecting channel category Program Descriptive Text (PDT)
In PTY mode, you can tune in and select 왘 Press d or c button. In PDT mode, you can call up additional in-
channels of a specific program type. formation on the channel, the current track
The individual program types are se-
and the performing artist(s).
lected.
Calling up PTY mode
왘 Press the TXT key.
왘 Start SAT radio mode. Tuning in a PTY channel The station category appears on the
왘 Press the PTY key. Once you have selected a program type, display.
you can tune in channels broadcasting a
The name of the channel currently 왘 Press the TXT key again within four
program that corresponds to the selected
being received is shown. seconds.
program type.
The title of the current track appears.
Leaving PTY mode 왘 Press f or e button.
왘 Press the TXT key again within four
왘 Press the CH key. The radio will tune to the next highest seconds.
The number of the channel currently or lowest channel broadcasting this
type of program. The name of the musician(s) of the cur-
being received is shown.
rent track appear on the display.

195
Controls in detail
Audio system

Cassette operation 왘 Fold display panel back up and press i


gently on the display panel frame to A warning signal will sound after 20
lock it in place. seconds if the display panel is left in
Playing cassettes
! the down position. Fold display panel
왘 Press 3 button.
back up. If the display panel is not
Do not press directly on the display
The display panel folds down and the closed, a warning signal will sound and
face. Otherwise the display will be
cassette compartment becomes ac- the radio will be muted.
damaged.
cessible.
왘 Insert cassette into the cassette com- Track selection
partment until it engages and tap it
gently.
The cassette will be pulled in automati-
cally. The system switches to cassette
mode. Side 1 will be played and SIDE 1
appears in the display. Side 1 is the or
side of the cassette which is facing up- 왘 Press the TRK key.
ward. The cassette deck will automati- 왘 If a cassette is already in the
The current track will be displayed as
cally detect the type of tape. mechanism, press j button.
SIDE 1 or SIDE 2.
왘 You can switch sides at any time.
The side will be changed automatically
at the end of the tape.

196
Controls in detail
Audio system

Cassette eject Track search Track search backward


왘 Press eject button 3. 왘 Press e button.
Track search forward
The display folds down and the cas- SEEK RWD will appear on the display.
sette is ejected. The system will switch Track search will run the tape back-
back to radio mode automatically. ward to the start of the track currently
왘 Fold display panel back up and press playing and switch to Play.
gently on the display panel frame to
lock it. Stopping track search
왘 Press f button. 왘 Press d, c, f or
! e button.
Do not press directly on the display SEEK FWD will appear in the display.
Track search will run the tape forward The cassette will switch over to Play.
face. Otherwise the display will be
damaged. to the start of the next track and switch
to Play.
i i
The cassette will not be ejected when The beginning of a track can only be
the system is switched off or switched found if there is pause of at least
to another operating mode. four seconds between tracks.

197
Controls in detail
Audio system

Scanning Fast forward/reverse Skipping blank sections (skip blank)


앫 Starting scan 앫 Starting cassette fast forward mode
Switching on the skip blank function
왘 Press the SB key.
SB is highlighted in the display.
If the system does not detect a sound
signal, the cassette will automatically
fast forward to the next sound signal.
왘 Press 2 button. 왘 Press d button.
SC will appear on the display. FORWARD will appear on the display. Switching off the skip blank function
Each track on the cassette will be 앫 Starting cassette fast reverse mode 왘 Press the SB key.
played briefly in ascending order. The highlighted SB in the display disap-
왘 Press c button.
앫 Stopping scan pears.
REWIND will appear on the display.
왘 Press 2, d, c, f or The cassette will automatically switch over
e button. to the play mode at the end or beginning of
The system will switch to Play. the tape.
앫 Stopping the cassette fast forward/re-
verse mode
왘 Press d, c, f or
e button.
The cassette will switch over to the
play mode.

198
Controls in detail
Audio system

Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system) Switching on CD changer* operation


To enable optimum sound reproduction of 왘 Press the NR key.
cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR, the General notes
NR is highlighted in the display.
Dolby NR system should be switched on.
Should excessively high temperatures oc-
i Switching off cur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will
왘 Press the NR key. appear on the display and the CD will be
The Dolby NR function should be
muted. The unit will then switch back to
switched off when playing cassettes The highlighted NR in the display disap- the last operating mode used until the tem-
not recorded with Dolby B NR. pears. perature has decreased to a safe operating
level.

Should excessively low temperatures oc-


cur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will ap-
pear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
1
DOLBY and the double-D symbol Ù are trade-
marks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora-
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interfer-
tion. ence during playback. Avoid fingerprints
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing apply any labels or other material to them.
Corporation.

199
Controls in detail
Audio system

Only use original CDs. Using copied CDs Your CD drive has been designed to Operational readiness of CD changer
may create problems during playback. play CDs which correspond to the If a CD changer has been installed in the
Clean CDs from time to time with a com- EN 60908 standard. system, it can be operated from the front
mercially available cleaning cloth. Do not If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g. control panel of the radio. A loaded maga-
use solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for ones that have data on both sides (one zine must be installed to play CDs.
cleaning. Replace the CD in its case after side with DVD data, the other side with
use. Protect CDs from heat and direct sun- audio data), they cannot be ejected and Loading/unloading the CD magazine
light. will damage the drive. 왘 Slide changer door to the right and
press eject button g.
Warning! G 왘 The magazine will be ejected.

The CD changer* is a Class 1 laser product.


Only use CDs, which bear the label shown There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
and that conform to the compact disc if the cover is opened or damaged.
digital audio standard (IEC 60908). You Do not remove the cover. The CD changer*
can therefore only use CDs with a maxi- does not contain any parts which can be ser-
mum thickness of 1.3 mm. viced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
i performed only by qualified personnel.
Use of CDs which do not meet this
standard may cause damage to the CD
changer. Do not play single-CDs
(80 mm) with an adapter.

200
Controls in detail
Audio system

i Selecting CDs
CDs which have been inserted improp-
erly or are unreadable will not be
played.

왘 Push magazine into CD changer in di-


rection of arrow and close sliding door.
왘 You can select from among the CDs in
Playing CDs the CD magazine using buttons 4
to 6.
1 CD 왘 Press i button.
2 CD changer CD and the magazine slot number of the
CD will appear on the display.
3 CD tray selected CD appear on the display. The
4 CD magazine The last CD listened to will then start play- number of the current track is dis-
ing at the point where it was switched off. played after TRACK.
왘 Remove magazine and pull CD tray fully After the last track on a CD has finished,
out. the next CD is automatically played.
왘 Place CD in recess of tray, label side
up.
왘 Push tray into magazine in direction of
arrow.
If there is no CD in the selected maga-
zine slot, NO CD appears on the display
with the corresponding slot number.

201
Controls in detail
Audio system

Skipping tracks forward/backward 앫 Fast reverse 앫 Ending scan


앫 Skipping tracks forward 왘 Press and hold c button until 왘 Press 2, d, c, f or
desired point has been reached. e button.
왘 Press f button.
The next track will be played. i Random play
앫 Skipping tracks backward The relative time of the track is shown
The random play function (RDM) plays the
on the display during the search.
왘 Press e button. tracks on the current CD in random order.

If the track has been playing for Scanning 앫 Switching on random play
more than ten seconds, it will revert
앫 Starting scan
to the start of that track. If it has
been playing for less than ten sec- 왘 Press 2 button.
onds, it will revert to the preceding
track.
Pressing the f or e button repeat-
edly will result in multiple tracks being 왘 Press the RDM key.
skipped. RDM is highlighted in the display.

SC appears in the display. 앫 Switching off random play


Fast forward/reverse
Each track on the current CD will be 왘 Press the RDM key.
앫 Fast forward
played for approx. eight seconds in The highlighted RDM in the display
왘 Press and hold d button until
ascending order. disappears.
desired point has been reached.

202
Controls in detail
Audio system

Repeat Track and time display Telephone* operation


The repeat function (RPT) repeats the cur-
Various car telephone* functions and op-
rent track.
erating steps for the car telephone can be
Switching on repeat: performed and displayed via the audio sys-
tem.
Further operating instructions not covered
왘 Press the T key. here can be found in the operating
instructions for the multifunction steering
The number of the track being played wheel, voice control* and the telephone*.
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.
왘 Press the RPT key.
왘 Press the T key.
RPT is highlighted in the display.
The total number of tracks and the total
Switching off repeat:
playing time of the CD appear in the
왘 Press the RPT key. display.
The highlighted RPT in the display dis- The CD main menu appears again after
appears. eight seconds.
i
The Random play and Repeat function
cannot be used simultaneously.

203
Controls in detail
Audio system

Switching on the telephone Switching off the telephone Placing a call


왘 Press h button. 왘 Press h button repeatedly until
Entering a telephone number and
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
If you have programmed an unlock starting the dialing process
code for the telephone, you must enter The receiving symbol in the display
the code now. disappears.
왘 Enter the desired telephone number
using buttons 4 to M. Adjusting the volume
왘 Turn control knob a during tele-
왘 If necessary, correct number entered
phone operation.
with the CLR key. Press key briefly to
delete the last digit entered; press key The volume increases or decreases de- 왘 Enter the desired telephone number
and hold to delete the complete num- pending on the direction in which the using buttons 4 to M.
ber. knob is turned. The number can have up to 32 digits,
왘 Press the OK key after entering correct but only 13 of these are visible on the
i display.
code.
The volume can be adjusted separately
The telephone is unlocked. If you have for the telephone*, voice control sys- If necessary, correct number entered with
entered the wrong code, you must re- tem* and radio. the CLR key.
peat the entering procedure with the 왘 Press key briefly to delete the last digit
correct code. entered.
왘 Press key and hold to delete the com-
plete number.
왘 After correct telephone number has
been entered, press the SND key.

204
Controls in detail
Audio system

Phone book Switching between name search and 왘 Press either the d or c button.
number search
The numbers stored in the phone book can The stored entries are selected accord-
be called up either by name or number. 왘 Press the ABC key. ing to the alphabetical order of the ini-
tial letter.
The name search is called up.
Calling up the phone book
or or
왘 Press either the f or e button.
왘 Press the NUM key.
The stored entries are selected in
The number search is called up.
increments of four.
Searching and calling up phone book en- or
tries by name 왘 Press the desired numerical key2 to
왘 Press d, c, f or e but-
ton. 9.
The stored entries are selected accord-
ing to the alphabetical order of the ini-
tial letters (e.g. for B -Brown, press
button 2 twice).

왘 Press the ABC key. i


The current name is highlighted on the Several characters and symbols cannot
display. be shown on the display for technical
reasons. They have been replaced with
spaces.

205
Controls in detail
Audio system

Searching and selecting phone book en- Starting dialing process Manual repeat dialing (redial)
tries by number
왘 Once you have selected a number,
press the SND key.

Repeat dialing
If the number dialed is busy, you can again
place calls to the last ten telephone num-
왘 Press the SND key.
bers dialed using the repeat dialing func-
왘 Press the NUM key. tion. The last number dialed is shown in the
The current number is marked in the display.
display.
왘 Select the desired telephone number
왘 Press either the d or c button. using d, c, f or
The stored entries are selected e button.
according to numerical order. The abbreviation L and the number of
the entry are shown in the top line of
or
the display.
왘 Press either the f or e button.
왘 When you have selected a number,
The stored entries are selected in press the SND key.
increments of 5 (e.g. Entry M5, Entry
M10,etc.)
The call will be made.

206
Controls in detail
Audio system

Automatic repeat dialing (redial) Speed dialing Quick-dialing


If a call cannot be connected, press 왘 Input desired entry number using 왘 Press one of the desired number
the SND key. number keys 4 to M. buttons 4 to M longer than one
second.
REDIAL will appear on the display and re- A maximum of two digits can be en-
peated attempts to place the call will be tered. The telephone number saved under
made for the next four minutes. If necessary, correct the last number that number will be dialed.
entered with the CLR key. !
Selecting numbers directly from the
directory 왘 Press the SND key. Please be aware that button 4
The telephone number stored under might already be reserved for an emer-
왘 Enter previously selected 3-digit
that entry will be dialed. The number, L gency call number.
(1-999) number of the entry using
number keys 4 to M. and the full entry number will be shown
in the display.
왘 Press the RCL key.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed.
왘 Press the SND key.
The call will be made.

207
Controls in detail
Audio system

Emergency call The call will also be placed even if the un- Accepting an incoming call
lock code is not entered.
왘 Press button 4 longer than one
Accepting an incoming call in telephone
second. Emergency calls may not be possible with
mode
all telephone networks or if certain net-
왘 A call will be placed to the saved num-
work services and/or telephone functions With an incoming call, a ringing tone can
ber (e.g. 911).
are active. Check with your local network be heard and the caller’s telephone num-
! operation company. It may take some time ber, or the name under which this tele-
Please be aware that the 911 emergen- to set up an emergency call. phone number has been saved in the
cy call system is a public service. Using telephone book, appears on the display. If
To use this function you must ensure that
it without due cause is a criminal of- the caller’s number is not transmitted,
the number stored in memory location 1 is
fense. CALL will appear in the display.
the number to be dialed in case of emer-
gency. 왘 Press the SND key to accept call.
You can make an emergency call to an If an emergency call cannot be connected,
emergency rescue station with a mobile the message SYSTM BUSY appears.
communications network.
The emergency call will be placed as long
as the corresponding mobile communica-
tions network is available. To do this,
switch the telephone on if this has not al-
ready been done.

208
Controls in detail
Audio system

Accepting an incoming call in cassette, Muting a call Call waiting


CD or radio mode
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is If you receive another call during an al-
If the telephone is activated in the back- then no longer able to hear you. ready active call, you can accept the sec-
ground (receiving symbol S visible on dis- ond call and switch between the two.
play), the audio source is muted when a Mute on
call is received. The ringing tone is heard Accepting a second call
왘 Press the MUT key.
and the caller’s telephone number or the
왘 Press the SND key.
name under which this telephone number
Mute off You are connected with the second
has been saved in the telephone book ap-
pears on the display. If the caller’s number 왘 Press the MUT key. caller, the first call is muted.
is not transmitted, CALL appears in the dis-
play. Terminating a call Switching between the calls
왘 Press the SND key to accept the call. 왘 Press the END key. 왘 Press the SND key.
The current call is terminated.
Terminating the second call
왘 Press the END key.
The current call will be terminated. You
are connected with the muted call
again.

209
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning! G If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
The side windows can be opened and
When closing the windows, make sure there you are closing the window by pulling and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the holding the switch, by pressing and holding
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
closing procedure. button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by press-
switches for the respective windows are
ing and holding the lock button
on the front passenger door and the rear The closing of the door windows can be im- (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door
side trim panels. mediately halted by releasing the switch or, handle, the automatic reversal function will
if switch was pulled past the resistance not operate.
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
The closing of the rear side windows can be SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
immediately halted by releasing the switch. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
The door windows are equipped with the ex- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
press-close and automatic reversal func- unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
tion. If a door window encounters an cle equipment can cause an accident
obstruction that blocks its path in a circum- and/or serious personal injury.
1 Left front window stance where you pulled the switch past the
2 Right front window resistance point and released it to close the
3 Right rear window window, the automatic reversal function will
4 Left rear window stop the window and open it slightly.
5 Rear window override switch
(컄 page 74)

210
Controls in detail
Power windows

i Opening the windows Fully opening the door windows


You can also open or close the win- (Express-open)
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
dows using the: point. 왘 Press switch 1 or 2 past the resis-
앫 SmartKey (summer opening/con- tance point and release.
The corresponding window will move
venience feature) (컄 page 212) downwards until you release the The corresponding window opens com-
앫 button , in the control panel of switch. pletely.
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 173). Closing the windows Fully closing the door windows
왘 Pull on switch 1 to 4 to the resis- (Express-close)
앫 button e in the control panel of
tance point. 왘 Pull switch 1 or 2 past the resis-
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 173). tance point and release.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch. The corresponding window closes com-
왘 Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to pletely.
position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button. Warning! G
If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
ing the window, and upward movement of
the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fin-
gers, etc., the automatic reversal will not op-
erate. 컄컄

211
Controls in detail
Power windows

컄컄 ! Opening and closing the windows with


If the upward movement of a door win- Warning! G the SmartKey
dow is blocked during the closing pro- The sliding/pop-up roof* (컄 page 214) will
Driver's door only:
cedure, the door window will stop and also be opened or closed when the power
If within five seconds you again pull the
open slightly. windows are operated with the SmartKey.
switch past the resistance point and re-
Remove the obstruction, pull the lease, the automatic reversal will not func-
switch again past the resistance point tion. Warning! G
and release.
If the door window still does not close Stopping windows Never operate the windows or
when there is no obstruction, then pull sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibil-
왘 Press or pull respective switch again. ity of anyone being harmed by the opening
the switch and hold it. The door window
will then close without the obstruction or closing procedure.
sensor function. In the event that the procedure causes po-
tential danger, the procedure can be imme-
diately halted by releasing the button on the
SmartKey. To reverse direction of move-
ment press Œ for opening or ‹ for
closing.

왘 Aim transmitter eye at the front door


handle.

212
Controls in detail
Power windows

Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing the side windows and Synchronizing power windows
sliding/pop-up roof* with KEYLESS-GO
왘 Press and hold button Œ after un-
The power windows must be resynchroni-
locking the vehicle. 왘 Press and hold lock button at door
zed each time
(컄 page 55) until the side windows and
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof*
the sliding/pop-up* roof are closed. 앫 after the battery has been disconnect-
begin to open after approximately one
ed.
second.
왘 Release the Œ button to stop proce- Warning! G 앫 if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed (Ex-
dure.
When closing the windows and the press-close).
sliding/pop-up roof* make sure there is no
Closing (Convenience feature)
danger of anyone being harmed by the clos- Synchronizing the power windows
왘 Press and hold button ‹ after lock- ing procedure. 왘 Switch ignition on.
ing the vehicle.
The windows will not automatically reopen if
왘 Pull the power window switches until
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof* blocked during convenience closing.
the side windows are closed.
begin to close after approximately one If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
second. Hold the switches for approximately
lows:
one second.
왘 Release the ‹ button to stop proce- 앫 Release the lock button.
dure. The power windows are adjusted.
앫 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
Make sure all side windows and the slid- The side windows and the
ing/pop-up roof* are properly closed be- sliding/pop-up roof* will open for about
fore leaving the vehicle. two seconds if the door handle is held
but the door not opened.

213
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
왔 Sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up With the roof closed or tilted open, a
roof screen can be slid into the roof opening to Warning! G
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened roof open, the screen will also retract. When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
and closed electrically. The switch for the sure there is no danger of anyone being
sliding/pop-up roof is on the overhead harmed by the closing procedure.
control panel. The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the switch or, if the switch was moved past
the resistance point and released, by mov-
ing the switch in any direction.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
1 Push up to raise roof at rear
cle equipment can cause an accident
2 Pull down to lower roof at rear
and/or serious personal injury.
3 Push forward to slide roof closed
4 Push back to slide roof open

214
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*

! i Opening and closing the


To avoid damaging the seals, do not You can also open or close the slid- sliding/pop-up roof
transport any objects with sharp edges ing/pop-up roof using the: 왘 To open, close, raise or lower the
which can stick out of the sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
앫 SmartKey (summer opening/con-
sliding/pop-up roof. to resistance point in the required
venience feature) (컄 page 212)
Do not open the sliding/pop-up roof if direction 1 to 4.
앫 button , in the control panel of
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this Release the switch when the roof has
the automatic climate control
could result in malfunctions. reached the desired position.
(컄 page 173)
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
앫 button e in the control panel of Fully opening (Express-open) and clos-
or closed manually should an electrical
the automatic climate control ing (Express-close) the
malfunction occur (컄 page 348).
(컄 page 173) sliding/pop-up roof
왘 To open, close, raise or lower the
왘 Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
position 1 or 2 or press the
past the resistance point in the re-
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
quired direction 1 to 4 and release.
The sliding/pop-up roof opens or clos-
es completely.

215
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*

Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof Opening (Summer opening feature)


왘 Move the switch in any direction.
Warning! G 왘 Press and hold button Œ after un-
Never operate the windows or locking the vehicle.
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up
roof is blocked during the closing pro- sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility The windows and the sliding/pop-up
cedure, the roof will stop and reopen of anyone being harmed by the opening or roof begin to open after approximately
slightly. closing procedure. one second.
In the event that the procedure causes po- 왘 Release the Œ button to stop proce-
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up tential danger, the procedure can be imme- dure.
roof with the SmartKey diately halted by releasing the button on the
The power windows (컄 page 212) will also SmartKey. To reverse direction of move- Closing (Convenience feature)
be opened or closed when you operate the ment, press Œ for opening or ‹ for
왘 Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey. closing.
ing the vehicle.

왘 Aim transmitter eye at the front door The windows and the sliding/pop-up
handle. roof begin to close after approximately
one second.
왘 Release ‹ button to stop proce-
dure.
Make sure all side windows and the slid-
ing/pop-up roof are properly closed before
leaving the vehicle.

216
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*

Closing the sliding/pop-up roof with Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof


KEYLESS-GO* (Convenience feature) Warning! G
The power sliding/pop-up roof must be re-
The power windows (컄 page 212) will also When closing the windows and the synchronized each time after:
be closed when the sliding/pop-up roof is sliding/pop-up roof, make sure there is no
operated with the SmartKey. 앫 the battery has been disconnected
danger of anyone being harmed by the clos-
왘 Press and hold lock button at door ing procedure. 앫 the sliding/pop-up roof has been
(컄 page 55) until the side windows and The sliding/pop-up roof will not automati-
closed manually
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed. cally reopen if blocked during convenience 앫 the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
closing. smoothly
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol- 앫 a malfunction
lows:
앫 Release the lock button. Synchronizing
앫 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly. 왘 Switch on ignition.
The side windows and the
왘 Press and hold the switch in
sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door
direction 1 until the sliding/pop-up
not opened. roof is fully raised at the rear.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
The sliding/pop-up roof is adjusted.

217
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control
scribed on the following pages: Warning! G
Cruise control automatically maintains the
앫 Cruise control and Distronic*, with
speed you set for your vehicle. Cruise control is a convenience system de-
which the vehicle can maintain a preset signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
speed Use of cruise control is recommended for
eration. The driver is and must remain at all
driving at a constant speed for extended
앫 Parktronic*, which serves as a parking times responsible for the vehicle speed and
periods of time. You can set or resume
assistant. for safe brake operation.
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
For information on the BAS, ABS, and ESP (30 km/h). Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
driving systems, see “Driving safety sys- and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control function is operated by travel at a steady speed.
tems” (컄 page 76).
means of the cruise control lever.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
lever found on the left-hand side of the because conditions do not allow safe
steering column (컄 page 20). driving at a steady speed.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.

218
Controls in detail
Driving systems

i !
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise Moving gear selector lever to
control may not be able to maintain the position N while driving also cancels
set speed. Once the grade eases, the cruise control. However, the gear se-
set speed will be resumed. lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
Canceling cruise control when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
i
왘 Step on the brake pedal.
2 Set current or lower speed The last stored speed is canceled when
3 Cancel cruise control or you turn off the engine.
4 Resume at last set speed 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Setting current speed
Cruise control will be canceled. The
왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired last speed set will be stored for later
speed. use.
왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.

219
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting a higher speed i Setting to last stored speed


When you use the cruise control lever (“Resume” function)
왘 Lift cruise control lever to position 1
and hold it up until the desired speed is to decelerate, the transmission will au-
reached. tomatically downshift if the engine’s Warning! G
braking power does not brake the vehi-
왘 Release cruise control lever.
cle sufficiently. The speed stored in memory should only be
The new speed is set. set again if prevailing road conditions per-
Fine adjustment in 1 mph mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
i differences arising from returning to the pre-
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Depressing the accelerator pedal does set speed could cause an accident and/or
not deactivate cruise control. After Faster serious injury to you and others.
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last 왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di-
rection of arrow 1. 왘 Briefly push cruise control lever to
speed set.
position 4.
Slower The cruise control will resume the last
Setting a lower speed
왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di- set speed.
왘 Depress cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the rection of arrow 2. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
desired speed is reached. pedal.

왘 Release cruise control lever.


The new speed is set.

220
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic*
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to traffic and road conditions
Warning! G
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
and to provide the steering, braking and oth- Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
cruise control system increases the driving
er driving inputs necessary to retain control tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
convenience afforded by the cruise control
of the vehicle. mend that you review the following
during travel on expressways and other
major roads. information carefully before operating the
system.
앫 If the Distronic distance sensor detects Warning! G
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed i
that you follow that vehicle at a preset adjustment reduction capability is intended For operation in the USA only: This de-
distance. to make cruise control more effective and vice complies with Part 15 of the
앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead of usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
you, Distronic will function in the same is not intended to, nor does it, replace the following two conditions:
way as cruise control (컄 page 218). need for extreme care. The responsibility for
앫 This device may not cause harmful
the vehicle speed and the distance to the ve-
interference, and
hicle ahead, including most importantly
Warning! G brake operation to assure safe stopping dis- 앫 this device must accept any inter-
tance, always rests with the driver. ference received, including interfer-
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub- ence that may cause undesired
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
stitute for active driving involvement. It does operation.
ditions into account.
not react to stationary objects, nor recog-
Any unauthorized modification to this
nize or predict the curvature and lane layout
device could void the user’s authority
or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distro-
to operate the equipment.
nic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the
vehicle’s braking power.

221
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Warning! G Warning! G Distronic is designed and intended only to


maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con- Close attention to road and traffic condi- tance from moving objects in front of it.
ditions into account. Only use Distronic if tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
the road, traffic and weather conditions whether or not Distronic is activated.
make it advisable to travel at a steady Warning! G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
speed. ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi- The “Resume” function should only be oper-
tions do not allow safe driving at a steady ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
speed. ously set speed and wishes to resume this
Warning! G Distronic will not react to stationary objects particular preset speed.
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Switch off Distronic:
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic 앫 when changing from the left to the right
during conditions of fog and heavy rain, lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
snow or sleet. in the left lane
앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫 in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.

222
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic displays in the speedometer 왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid


dial a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the follow-
ing warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the Distronic warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
1 Segments to the vehicle ahead is reestablished.
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
1 Set speed ahead, the segments (representing the dif-
If Distronic is activated, one or two seg- ference) between the speed of the vehicle
ments come on around the set speed. ahead and the set speed come on.
If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
i ger of collision when the distance warning
The vehicle speed displayed on the function is activated (컄 page 230):
speedometer can briefly vary from the
speed setting on the Distronic system. 앫 The Distronic warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
앫 An intermittent warning sounds.

223
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic menu in the control system


Warning! G Warning! G In the Distronic menu you see the current
An intermittent warning sounds and the Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi- settings for Distronic. What appears in the
Distance warning lamp in the instrument mum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corre- display depends on whether Distronic and
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system sponds to about 20% of the maximum the distance warning function are turned
calculates that the distance to the vehicle deceleration ability of your vehicle. on or off.
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indi- Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
cate that Distronic will not be capable of restore the preset distance or to maintain until you see one of the following dis-
slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the speed. The brake pedal is automatically plays.
the preset following distance, which creates applied as this happens which results in the
a danger of a collision. brake pedal moving.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-
the distance to the vehicle in front of you. cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
The warning sound is intended as a final cau- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
tion that you have not interceded with your movement which could interfere with the
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially braking ability of the Distronic system.
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the op-
eration of the warning signal to intercede Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
with your own braking, as that will result in – your foot could become caught.
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact be-
ing avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

224
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic deactivated Distronic activated Cruise control lever


If Distronic is deactivated the standard dis- When you turn Distronic on, you will see The Distronic system is operated by means
play of Distronic appears in the multifunc- the set speed in the multifunction display of the cruise control lever.
tion display. for about five seconds. If Distronic is
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
activated, you can see the following dis-
lever found on the left-hand side of the
play in the multifunction display.
steering column.

1 Vehicle ahead, if detected


2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance treshold to vehicle 1 Distronic activated
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function 1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at last set speed

225
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Activating Distronic Setting the current speed Setting a higher speed


You can activate Distronic if 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired 왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di-
speed. rection of arrow 1 (컄 page 225) to in-
앫 you are driving between 25 mph
crease vehicle speed in increments of
(40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h) 왘 Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
앫 the ESP is activated (컄 page 78) lever.
Distronic is activated and the current The new speed is set.
If Distronic has not been activated after
speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the
pressing the cruise control lever you will
multifunction display for approximately
see the message --- in the multifunction 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
five seconds (컄 page 225), and one or
display. pedal.
two segments around the stored speed
In the following cases you cannot activate i come on, on the speedometer
Distronic: (컄 page 223).
If you do not take your foot off of the
앫 up to two minutes after starting the en- accelerator completely, the following i
gine. message will appear in the multifunc-
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
앫 when you brake. tion display:
not deactivate Distronic. After brief ac-
Distronic override.
앫 if you have set the parking brake. celeration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
Distronic will not work to maintain the
control will resume the last speed set.
앫 if the gear selector lever is in distance to slower moving vehicles in
position P, R or N. front of you. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accel-
앫 if ESP is switched off.
erator pedal position.

226
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting a lower speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph Setting to last stored speed
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments (“Resume” function)
왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di-
rection of arrow 2 (컄 page 225) to de-
crease vehicle speed in increments of 5
Faster
Warning! G
mph (Canada: 10 km/h). 왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di-
rection of arrow 4 (컄 page 225). The speed stored in memory should only be
The new speed is set.
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
The stored speed is displayed in the mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
multifunction display for approximately differences arising from returning to the pre-
five seconds (컄 page 225), and one or set speed could cause an accident and/or
two segments around the stored speed serious injury to you and others.
come on, on the speedometer
(컄 page 223).
왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di-
i rection of arrow 4 (컄 page 225).
When you use the cruise control lever Distronic is set to the last stored
to decelerate, the transmission will au- speed.
tomatically downshift if the rate of de- 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
celeration is too low. pedal.

227
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when Setting the following distance in
Distronic
There are several ways to deactivate the 앫 you set the parking brake
Distronic system: You can set the specified following dis-
앫 you drive slower than 25 mph
tance for Distronic by varying the time set-
왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di- (40 km/h)
ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
rection of arrow 3 (컄 page 225). 앫 the ESP is active (컄 page 78) or you de- this time setting and the current speed of
or activate the ESP your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
왘 Step on the brake pedal. 앫 you move the gear selector lever into the required following distance to the vehi-
position N. cle ahead. The set distance will be shown
Distronic will be deactivated. The last in the multifunction display field.
speed set will be stored into memory. A signal will sound. The Distronic off
message appears in the multifunction The thumbwheel for making the time set-
i display for approximately five seconds. ting is located on the lower section of the
The following message will appear in center console.
the multifunction display for approxi-
Warning! G
mately five seconds: Distronic off. Warning! G
The last stored speed is deleted when Distronic switches off and releases the
you turn off the engine. brakes when the vehicle decelerates below It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
the minimum speed of approximately select the appropriate setting given road
25 mph ( 40 km/h) by operation of the sys- conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
tem. At that time the driver must apply the style and applicable laws and driving recom-
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed fur- mendations for safe following distance.
ther or bring it to a stop.

228
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Decreasing distance ahead is sufficient again without applying


the brake pedal. In this case the distance
Decreasing the distance setting causes
warning lamp also extinguishes.
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®. Warning! G
If the distance warning lamp l in the in-
Distance warning function
strument cluster comes on while driving
When Distronic is deactivated, this func- and/or an intermittent warning sounds, im-
tion will continue to warn you when recog- mediate attention on the part of the driver is
1 Distance warning function on/off nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower required.
switch vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
2 Control lamp As required by the traffic situation, apply the
the danger of a collision exists:
3 Thumbwheel for setting distance brakes and navigate around a possible ob-
앫 The distance warning lamp l in the stacle. However, do not drive by relying on
Increasing distance instrument cluster comes on the distance warning function, as this will re-
sult in an emergency braking application.
Increasing the distance setting causes 앫 An intermittent warning sounds.
Especially depending on road surface condi-
Distronic to maintain a greater following If these warnings are issued, you must tions and driver reaction, this will not always
distance to the vehicle ahead. brake manually to maintain a safe distance enable you to avoid a collision.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯. and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
i
When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-
Complex driving situations are not al-
ing sound stops. The warning sound also
ways fully recognized by Distronic. This
stops when the distance to the vehicle
could result in wrong or missing dis-
tance warnings.

229
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Activating Driving with Distronic


Distronic regulates only the distance be-
왘 Press switch 1. This section describes a number of driving tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
situations where special precaution is re- of it, but does not register stationary objects
Indicator lamp 2 on the switch comes
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre- in the road, e.g.:
on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
pared to brake in such situations. This will 앫
the multifunction display (컄 page 225). a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
deactivate the Distronic system.
앫 a disabled vehicle
Deactivating
앫 an oncoming vehicle
왘 Press switch 1. Warning! G
The driver must always be on the alert, ob-
Indicator lamp 2 on the switch goes Distronic works to maintain the speed se- serve all traffic and intercede as required by
out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in lected by the driver unless a moving obsta- steering or braking the vehicle.
the multifunction display. cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis- Warning! G
tance set by Distronic). This means that:
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle road conditions.
after you change lanes.
앫 While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it. Your vehicle could then accelerate
to the previously selected speed.

230
Controls in detail
Driving systems

The most likely cause for a malfunctioning i Turns and bends


system is a dirty sensor (located behind If the message
the hood grille), especially at times of snow Distronic
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Currently unavailable!
Distronic will switch off, and the message see oper. manual
Distronic disappears during driving and the last
Currently unavailable! speed stored flashes for approximately
see oper. manual five seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has
appears in the multifunction display. dissolved; Distronic works again.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄 page 301). In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.

231
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles

A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle
from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient traveling near the edge of the roadway has
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the lane changing vehicle. not yet been detected by Distronic. There
cient distance to the vehicle ahead. will be insufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.

232
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Parktronic (Parking assist)* The Parktronic system monitors the sur-


Warning! G roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
Warning! G Make sure no persons or animals are in the rear bumper.
area in which you are maneuvering. You
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is could otherwise injure them.
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
during parking and other critical maneuvers designed to assist the driver during park-
always rests with the driver. ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
Special attention must be paid to objects cates the relative distance between the
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle.
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts or road The Parktronic system is automatically ac-
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by tivated when you switch on the ignition
the system and can damage the vehicle. and release the parking brake. The 1 Sensors in the front bumper
The operational function of the Parktronic Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
system can be affected by dirty sensors, es- over approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At
pecially at times of snow and ice, see lower speeds the Parktronic system turns
“Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors” on again.
(컄 page 301).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
nals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be tak-
en into consideration.

233
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Range of the sensors Front sensors !


To function properly, the sensors must be During parking maneuvers, pay special
Center approx. 39 in (100 cm) attention to objects located above or
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to Corners approx. 23,5 in (60 cm) below the height of the sensors (e.g.
scratch or damage the sensors. planters or trailer hitches). The Parktro-
Rear sensors nic system will not detect such objects
at close range and damage to your ve-
Center approx. 47 in (120 cm) hicle or the object may result.
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc-
es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackham-
mers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.

Minimum distance

Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)


Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)

If the system encounters an obstacle in


this range, all the warning lamps come on
and you hear a warning signal. If the obsta-
cle is closer than the minimum distance,
the actual distance may no longer be indi-
cated by the system.

234
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Warning indicators Each warning indicator is divided into six As your vehicle approaches an object, one
yellow and two red segments for either or more segments will come on, depending
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system on the distance. When the eighth segment
ative distance between the sensors and an
is ready when the border around the indi- comes on, you have reached the minimum
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
cator is illuminated. distance.
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard. The warning indi- The position of the gear selector lever de- 앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic
cator for the rear area is integrated in the termines which warning indicators will be warning will sound as the first red seg-
rear dome lighting. activated. ment comes on and a constant acous-
tic warning lasting a maximum of three
Gear selector le- Warning indicator
seconds will sound for the second red
ver position
segment. The signal is canceled when
D Front area activated the gear selector lever is placed in
R or N Front and rear area position P.
activated 앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
P Neither activated warning will sound as the first red seg-
ment comes on and a constant acous-
tic warning lasting a maximum of three
seconds will sound for the second red
Front area warning indicator segment. The signal is canceled when
1 Left side of the vehicle the gear selector lever is placed in po-
2 Right side of the vehicle sition D or P.

235
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Switching the Parktronic system Switching off the Parktronic system


on/off
왘 Press upper half 1 of the switch.
You can switch off the Parktronic system
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
manually.
The Parktronic switch is located in the cen- Switching on the Parktronic system
ter console. 왘 Press lower half 3 of the switch.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.

1 Parktronic off
2 Indicator lamp
3 Parktronic on

236
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Roof rack Preparing roof rack installation Ski sack*
왘 Open trim 1 at the trim strips in the
roof.
Warning! G
왘 Secure the roof rack according to man-
Only use roof racks approved by Merce- ufacturer’s instructions for installation.
des-Benz for your vehicle model to avoid
damage to the vehicle. Follow manufactur- !
er’s installation instructions. Load the roof rack in such a way that
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.
Make sure
1 Handle
앫 you can fully raise the 2 Cover
sliding/pop-up roof* 3 Armrest
앫 you can fully open the trunk
Unfolding and loading
왘 Fold armrest 3 down (arrow).
왘 Pull handle 1 and swing cover 2
down. 컄컄
1 Trim

237
Controls in detail
Loading

컄컄

4 Velcro strap 5 Button 왘 From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.
왘 Unfasten velcro strap 4. 왘 Open trunk lid.
왘 Pull ski sack into passenger compart- 왘 Press button 5. Warning! G
ment and unfold. The flap opens downward. The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.

238
Controls in detail
Loading

Unloading and folding


왘 Loosen both straps.
왘 Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8.
왘 Unload skis.
왘 Close flap in trunk.
왘 Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.
왘 Place folded ski sack inside recess of
backrest.
6 Strap 7 Hook
8 Eye 왘 Fasten velcro strap
왘 Tighten strap 6 by pulling at the loose
end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack 왘 Connect hook 7 to eye 8 located on
are tightly secured. center tunnel in front of rear seat
bench.
왘 Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
end (arrow).

왘 Close ski sack compartment cover.

239
Controls in detail
Loading

Removal of ski sack Split rear bench seat


You can remove the ski sack for cleaning
Warning! G
To expand the cargo area, you can fold
or drying. Never drive vehicle with trunk open while down the left and right rear seat backrests.
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
The two sections can be folded down sep-
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
arately.
terior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
Warning! G
i When expanding the luggage compartment,
To prevent unauthorized persons from always fold the seat cushions fully forward.
access to the trunk, always close the
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-
flap.
rests must remain properly locked in the up-
1 Button
right position.
2 Ski sack frame Installing the ski sack
3 Flap In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
Install the ski sack in the reverse order. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
왘 Open trunk lid.
왘 Push ski sack frame 2 with ski sack around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
왘 Press button 1. inward until the ski sack frame snaps to vehicle occupants unless the items are
into place. securely fastened in the vehicle.
The flap 3 opens downward.
왘 Close flap 3. Always use the cargo tie down rings
왘 Press button 1 firmly until ski sack
(컄 page 243).
frame 2 is released. 왘 Close trunk lid.
왘 Pull ski sack frame 2 with ski sack
out.

240
Controls in detail
Loading

Folding the backrest forward


The release handle 1 is located in the
trunk.

왘 Pull release handle 2. 왘 Fold seat cushion 3 forward.


왘 Fold rear seat backrests 4 forward.

왘 Pull release handle 1.


왘 Fully retract and fold rearward head re-
straint (컄 page 110).

241
Controls in detail
Loading

Setting up rear seat bench Loading instructions


Warning! G
If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
up, then the backrest is not properly locked
into position.
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the ex-
tended trunk compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.
왘 Fold backrest 4 rearward until it en- In an accident, during hard braking or sud- The total load weight including vehicle oc-
gages. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex-
왘 Fold seat cushions 3 rearward until it around inside the vehicle, and cause injury ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
locks into position. to vehicle occupants unless the items are on the certification tag which can be found
securely fastened in the vehicle. on the left door pillar.
If a backrest is not locked into position, a
red indicator 5 or 6 will be visible. To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
왘 Check for secure locking by pushing
when transporting cargo.
and pulling on the backrest.

i
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always lock back-
rest in its upright position.

242
Controls in detail
Loading

The handling characteristics of a fully load- Cargo tie-down rings


ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis- Warning! G
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra- Always fasten items being carried as secure-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being ly as possible.
placed towards the front of the vehicle. In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
Always place items being carried against den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
them as securely as possible. jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al-
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
ways be kept as low as possible since it in-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care Four rings are located in the cargo com-
fluences the handling characteristics of
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car- partment.
the vehicle.
go in the trunk if possible. Do not pile lug-
왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying
gage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
even load on all rings with rope of suffi-
Do not place anything on the rear-window
cient strength to hold down the cargo.
shelf.
Always follow loading instructions
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
(컄 page 242).
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.

243
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Interior storage spaces Glove box Opening the glove box
왘 Pull lid release 2.
Warning! G The glove box lid opens downward.

To help avoid personal injury during a colli- Closing the glove box
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
왘 Push lid up to close.
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if i
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher The glove box lid contains a compart-
than the seat backs. ment for eyeglasses.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy 1 Glove box
Close the compartment for glasses first
objects. 2 Glove box lid release
before closing the glove box.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
Audio system/COMAND* with CD
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
changer*: The CD changer is located in
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
the glove box.
an accident.

244
Controls in detail
Useful features

Cup holder in the dashboard Closing cup holder


왘 Push the cup holder back until it engag-
Warning! G es.

When not in use, keep the cup holder Cup holder in rear seat armrest
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
Warning! G
a height where the contents, especially hot
When not in use, keep the cup holder
liquids, could spill during vehicle
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
maneuvers. Opening cup holder
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to 왘 Push front of sliding compartment 1.
Opening cup holder a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle The cup holder slides out.
maneuvers.
Closing cup holder
왘 Push sliding compartment 1 back un-
til it engages.

왘 Push cover 1.
The cup holder opens automatically.

245
Controls in detail
Useful features

Armrest storage space Opening telephone compartment Changing inclination of armrest


왘 Lift armrest by pushing button 2
or 3.

Closing telephone compartment


왘 Lower armrest until it locks into place.

Locking compartment
왘 Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 343).
왘 Pull up on armrest.
Opening compartment in armrest 왘 Turn the compartment lock to
왘 Lift armrest by pulling on handle 1. position 5. Lowering armrest
Unlocking compartment 왘 Pull handle 1 to lower armrest.
Closing
왘 Turn the compartment lock to
왘 Lower armrest until it locks into place.
position 4.
! 왘 Insert the mechanical key in the
Do not store any items between the SmartKey.
telephone holder and the cover for the
blower. Otherwise these items could
be damaged when the holder is closed.
Use the space in the front door pocket
for stowing.

246
Controls in detail
Useful features

Storage bags Parcel net in front passenger footwell Ashtrays


Storage bags are located on the rear side A small convenience parcel net is located
of the front seats. in the front passenger footwell. It is for Center console ashtray
small and light items, such as road maps,
Warning! G mail, etc.

Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob- Warning! G


jects having sharp edges, in the storage
bags. Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob-
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
den maneuvers, they could be thrown In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury den maneuvers, they could be thrown
to vehicle occupants. around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants. Opening ashtray
왘 Briefly touch cover plate 1.
The ashtray opens automatically.

247
Controls in detail
Useful features

Removing ashtray insert Rear seat ashtray Cigarette lighter

Warning! G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
cure vehicle from movement. Move gear se-
lector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.

왘 Secure vehicle from movement by set-


ting the parking brake. Move the gear Opening ashtray 1 Cover
selector lever to position N. 2 Cigarette lighter
왘 Pull at top of cover to open ashtray.
Now you have more room to take out 왘 Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
the insert. Removing ashtray insert position 1 or 2.
왘 Push sliding button 2 to the right. 왘 Press latch 1 to disengage ashtray in- 왘 Briefly touch cover plate 1.
sert and remove it. 왘 Push in cigarette lighter 2.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides a
short way in direction of arrow 3. The lighter will pop out automatically
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘 Remove insert from ashtray frame. when hot.
왘 Install ashtray insert.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert 왘 Close the ashtray.
왘 Install insert by pushing back into
frame until it engages again.

248
Controls in detail
Useful features

Floormats*
Warning! G Warning! G
Never touch the heating element or sides of Whenever you are using floormats, make
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the sure there is enough clearance and that the
knob only. floormats are securely fastened.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Floormats should always be securely fas-
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the tened using eyelets 4 and retainer
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and pins 5.
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- Before driving off, check that the floormats
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an are securely in place and adjust them if nec-
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- essary. A loose floormat could slip and
cle equipment may cause an accident Removing hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
and/or serious personal injury.
왘 Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2 in
direction of arrow 1.
i 왘 Remove the floormats.
The lighter socket can be used to ac-
commodate electrical accessories up Installing
to a maximum 85 W.
왘 Lay down the floormat.
왘 Press the floormat eyelets 4 onto re-
tainer pins 5 in direction of arrow 3.

249
Controls in detail
Useful features

Telephone*
Warning! G Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re- covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (ap-
proximately 13.5 m) every second.
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
Never operate radio transmitters equipped attention to the road must always be
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his/her primary focus when driving. For You can take and place telephone calls us-
out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec- ing the í and ì buttons on the
from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location steering wheel. To carry out other tele-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele- phone functions, use the control system
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- phone call. (컄 page 154).
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious If you choose to use the telephone1 while See separate operating manual for instruc-
personal injury. driving, please use the hands-free device tions on how to use the telephone.
and only use the telephone when road, traf-
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- fic and weather conditions permit. Some ju-
phone or a citizens band unit, should only risdictions prohibit the driver from using a
be used inside the vehicle if they are con- cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
nected to an antenna that is installed on Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Man-
the outside of the vehicle. agement and Data System)1 if road, traffic
The external antenna must be approved by and weather conditions permit.
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- 1
Observe all legal requirements.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.

250
Controls in detail
Useful features

Tele Aid The Tele Aid system i


(Telematic Alarm Identification on De- The SOS button is located above the in-
! mand) terior rear view mirror.
The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys- The Roadside Assistance button •
The Tele Aid system consists of three
tem may only be performed by com- and the Information button ¡ are
types of response:
pleting the subscriber agreement and located below the center armrest cov-
placing an acquaintance call using the 앫 automatic and manual emergency
er.
SOS button. Failure to complete either 앫 roadside assistance and
of these steps will result in a system
앫 information Shortly after the completion of your
that is not activated. If the system is
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive
not activated, the indicator lamp in the The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
a user ID and password via first call mail.
SOS button stays on after turning ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting
SmartKey in starter switch to properly connected, not damaged and cel-
“Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access
position 2 or pressing KEYLESS-GO* lular and GPS coverage is available.
to account information, remote door un-
start/stop button twice to position 2
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can lock, Info Services profile and more.
(컄 page 33). The message Tele Aid
be adjusted when using the volume control
not activated will be shown in the !
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
multifunction display for approximately
raise, press button æ and to lower, The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
ten seconds.
press button ç. network for communication and the
If you have any questions regarding ac- GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the
tivation, please call the Response Cen- lites for vehicle location. If either of
Roadside Assistance button • or
ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or these signals is unavailable, the
the Information button ¡, depend-
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). Tele Aid system may not function and if
ing on the type of response required.
this occurs, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.

251
Controls in detail
Useful features

System self-check Emergency calls


Initially, after turning the ignition
Warning! G An emergency call is initiated
(position 2) on, malfunctions are detected If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in automatically:
and indicated (the indicator lamps in the the Roadside Assistance button and/or in 앫 following an accident in which the
SOS button, the Roadside Assistance the Information button remain illuminated emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
button • and the Information constantly in red and/or message or airbags deploy
button ¡ stay on longer than ten sec- Tele Aid defective! Visit work-
onds or do not come on). The message 앫 if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
shop! is displayed in the multifunction dis-
Tele Aid defective! Visit workshop! alarm stays on for more than
play after the system self-check, a
appears for approximately ten seconds in 20 seconds, see “Anti-theft systems”
malfunction in the system has been
the multifunction display. (컄 page 81) and see “Tow-away alarm”
detected.
(컄 page 83).
i If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
An emergency call can also be initiated
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular above, the system may not operate as ex-
manually by opening the cover next to the
network for communication and the pected. Have the system checked at the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel- nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
briefly pressing the button located under
lites for vehicle location. If either of possible.
the cover. See below for instructions on
these signals is unavailable, the initiating an emergency call manually.
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be sum- Once the emergency call is in progress, the
moned by other means. indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message Emergency call –
Connecting call appears in the multifunc-
tion display.

252
Controls in detail
Useful features

When the connection is established, the The Tele Aid system is available if:
message Emergency call – Call con-
앫 it has been activated and is operation-
Warning! G
nected appears in the multifunction dis-
al. Activation requires a subscription If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il-
play. All information relevant to the
for monitoring services, connection luminated continuously and there was no
emergency, such as the location of the ve-
and cellular air time voice connection to the Response Center
hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca-
tion system), vehicle model, identification 앫 the relevant cellular phone network established, then the Tele Aid system could
number and color are generated. and GPS signals are available and pass not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
the information on to the response vant cellular phone network is not available).
A voice connection between the Response The message Emergency call –
center
Center and the occupants of the vehicle Call failed appears in the multifunction
will be established automatically soon af- i display for approximately ten seconds.
ter the emergency call has been initiated. Location of the vehicle on a map is only
When a voice connection is established, Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
possible if the vehicle is able to receive moned by other means.
the audio system mutes and the message signals from the GPS satellite network
Tele Aid – Emergency call active ap- and pass the information on to the re-
pears in the multifunction display. The Re- sponse center.
sponse Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.

253
Controls in detail
Useful features

Initiating an emergency call manually 왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Re- Roadside Assistance button •
sponse Center.
The Roadside Assistance button • is
왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency located below the center armrest cover.
call is concluded.
왘 Press and hold the button (for longer
than two seconds).
Warning! G A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
The button will flash while the call is in
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
progress. The message Roadside As-
hicle in a dangerous road location), please
sistance – Connecting call will ap-
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pear in the multifunction display.
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca- When the connection is established, the
tion. The Response Center will automatically message Roadside Assistance –
contact local emergency officials with the Call connected appears in the multifunc-
1 Cover vehicle’s approximate location if they re- tion display. The Tele Aid system will trans-
2 SOS button ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot mit data generating the vehicle
make voice contact with the vehicle occu- identification number, model, color and lo-
왘 Briefly press on cover 1.
pants. cation (subject to availability of cellular
The cover will open. and GPS signals).
왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.

254
Controls in detail
Useful features

A voice connection between the Roadside These programs are only available in the If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants USA: Assistance button • is illuminated
of the vehicle will be established. When a continuously and there was no voice
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such
voice connection is established, the audio connection to the Response Center es-
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
system mutes and the message Tele Aid tablished, then the Tele Aid system
the replacement of a flat tire with the
– Roadside Assistance call active ap- could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
pears in the multifunction display. tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
앫 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func-
왘 Describe the nature of the need for as- phone network is not available). The
tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road- message Roadside Assistance –
sistance.
side Assistance dispatcher to Call failed appears in the multifunc-
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance download malfunction codes and actu- tion display.
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified al vehicle data.
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to Roadside Assistance calls can be ter-
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized i minated using the ì button on the
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such The indicator lamp on the Roadside As- multifunction steering wheel.
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap- sistance button • remains illumi-
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance man- nated in red for approximately ten
ual for more information. seconds during the system self-check
after turning the ignition (position 2) on
(together with the SOS button and the
Information button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 252)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately ten seconds.

255
Controls in detail
Useful features

Information button ¡ mation regarding the operation of your ve- If the indicator lamp on the Information
The Information button ¡ is located be-
hicle, the nearest authorized button ¡ is illuminated continuous-
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz ly and there was no voice connection to
low the center armrest cover.
USA products and services is available to the Response Center established, then
왘 Press and hold the button (for longer you. the Tele Aid system could not initiate
than two seconds). an Information call (e.g. the relevant
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen- system, please visit www.mbusa.com and cellular phone network is not avail-
ter will be initiated. The button will use your ID and password (sent to you sep- able). The message
flash while the call is in progress. The arately) to learn more (USA only). Info – Call failed appears in the
message Info – Connecting call will multifunction display.
appear in the multifunction display. i Information calls can be terminated us-
When the connection is established, the The indicator lamp on the Information ing the ì button on the multifunc-
message Info – Call connected appears button ¡ remains illuminated in red tion steering wheel.
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid for approximately ten seconds during
system will transmit data generating the the system self-check after turning the
vehicle identification number, model, color ignition (position 2) on (together with
and location (subject to availability of cel- the SOS button and the Roadside As-
lular and GPS signals). sistance button •).

A voice connection between the Customer See System self-check (컄 page 252)
Assistance Center representative and the when the indicator lamp does not come
occupants of the vehicle will be estab- on in red or stays on longer than ap-
lished. When a voice connection is estab- proximately ten seconds.
lished, the audio system mutes and the
message Tele Aid – Info call active
appears in the multifunction display. Infor-

256
Controls in detail
Useful features

! Upgrade signals !
If the indicator lamps do not start flash- The Tele Aid system processes calls using If the indicator lamp continues to flash
ing after pressing one of the buttons or the following priority. or the system does not reset, contact
remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Response Center at
앫 Automatic emergency – First priority
the Tele Aid system has detected a 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
fault or the service is not currently ac- 앫 Manual emergency – Second priority 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit 앫 Roadside assistance – Third priority Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
and have the system checked or con- 앫 Information – Fourth priority (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
tact the Response Center at Should a higher priority call be initiated Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or while you are connected, an upgrade (al- in Canada.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon ternating) tone will be heard, and the ap-
as possible. propriate indicator lamp will flash. If i
certain information such as vehicle identi- The indicator lamp in the respective
fication number or customer information is button flashes until the call is conclud-
not available, the operator may need to ed. Calls can only be terminated by a
retransmit. Response Center or Customer Assis-
During this time you will hear a beep and tance Center representative except
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice Roadside Assistance and Information
contact will resume once the retransmis- calls, which can also be terminated by
sion is completed. Once a call is conclud- pressing button ì on the multifunc-
ed, a beep will be heard and the respective tion steering wheel.
indicator lamp will stop flashing. The
COMAND* system operation will resume.

257
Controls in detail
Useful features

i Remote door unlock The Response Center will then unlock your
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, vehicle with the remote door unlocking
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
the audio system or the COMAND* sys- feature.
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
tem audio is muted and the selected and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: i
mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response The remote door unlock feature is avail-
optional cellular phone (if installed)
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) able if the relevant cellular phone net-
switches off. If you must use this
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). work is available.
phone, the vehicle must be parked. Dis-
connect the coiled cord and place the You will be asked to provide your pass- The SOS button will flash and the mes-
call. The COMAND* navigation system word which you provided when you sage Emergency call –
(if engaged) will continue to run. The completed the subscriber agreement. Call connected will appear in the mul-
display in the instrument cluster is 왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the tifunction display to indicate receipt of
available for use and spoken com- trunk recessed handle for a minimum the door unlock command.
mands are only available by pressing of 20 seconds until the SOS button is Once the vehicle is unlocked,
the RPT button on the COMAND* unit. flashing. a Response Center specialist will at-
A pop-up window will appear in the tempt to establish voice contact with
COMAND* display to indicate that a The message Emergency call –
Call connected appears in the multi- the vehicle occupants.
Tele Aid call is in progress.
function display. If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- for more than 20 seconds before door
cle via Internet using the ID and password unlock authorization was received by
sent to you shortly after the completion of the Response Center, you must wait
your acquaintance call. 15 minutes before pulling the trunk re-
cessed handle again.

258
Controls in detail
Useful features

Stolen vehicle tracking services Garage door opener


In the event your vehicle was stolen:
The built-in remote control is capable of
왘 Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
The police will issue a numbered inci- devices, for example garage door openers,
dent report. gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink® or some other systems.
왘 Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along You can program the signal transmitter
with your password issued to you when buttons.
you subscribed to the service. Remote control integrated into the interior
rear view mirror
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s 1 Indicator lamp
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is lo- 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
cated, the Response Center will con-
tact the local law enforcement and you. 5 Hand-held transmitter button
The vehicle’s location will only be pro- 6 Hand-held remote control trans-
vided to law enforcement. mitter (not part of the vehicle
equipment)

259
Controls in detail
Useful features

i i
Warning! G Certain types of garage door openers For operation in the USA only:
are incompatible with the integrated This device complies with Part 15 of
Before programming the integrated remote
opener. If you should experience diffi- the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
control to a garage door opener or gate op-
culties with programming the transmit- the following two conditions:
erator, make sure that people and objects
ter, contact your authorized (1) This device may not cause harmful
are out of the way of the device to prevent
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call interference, and
potential harm or damage.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
When programming a garage door opener, Center (in the USA only) at (2) this device must accept any inter-
the door moves up or down. When program- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer ference received, including interfer-
ming a gate operator, the gate opens or Service (in Canada) at ence that may cause undesired
closes. 1-800-387-0100. operation.
Do not use the integrated remote control Any unauthorized modification to this
with any garage door opener that lacks safe- device could void the user’s authority
ty stop and reverse features as required by to operate the equipment.
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.

260
Controls in detail
Useful features

Programming or reprogramming the in- Step 3: i


tegrated remote control The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first
왘 Hold the end of the hand-held remote
Step 1: control transmitter 6 of the device time the signal transmitter button is
you wish to train approximately 2 to programmed. If this button has already
왘 Switch on ignition.
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface been programmed, the indicator lamp
Step 2: of the integrated remote control locat- will only start flashing after 20 sec-
왘 If you have previously programmed an ed on the interior rear view mirror, onds.
integrated signal transmitter button keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
and wish to retain its programming, Step 4: Step 5:
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press 왘 When the indicator lamp 1 flashes
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously
and hold the two outer signal transmit- rapidly, release both buttons.
press the hand-held transmitter
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
button 5 and the desired integrated Step 6:
them only when the indicator light be-
signal transmitter button (2, 3
gins to flash after approximately 20 왘 Press and hold the just-trained inte-
or 4). Do not release the buttons until
seconds (do not hold the button for grated signal transmitter button and
completing step 5.
longer than 30 seconds). This proce- observe the indicator lamp 1.
dure erases any previous settings for The indicator lamp 1 on the integrat-
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on con-
all three channels and initializes the ed remote control will flash, first slowly
stantly, programming is complete and
memory. If you later wish to program a and then rapidly.
your device should activate when the
second and/or third hand-held trans-
integrated signal transmitter button is
mitter to the remaining two signal
pressed and released.
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.

261
Controls in detail
Useful features

i Rolling code programming Step 9:


If the indicator lamp 1 blinks rapidly To train a garage door opener (or other roll- 왘 Press “training” button on the garage
for about two seconds and then turns ing code devices) with the rolling code fea- door opener motor head unit.
to a constant light, continue with pro- ture, follow these instructions after
The “training light” is activated.
gramming steps 8 through 12 as your completing the “Programming” portion
garage door opener may be equipped (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
with the “rolling code” feature. person may make the following training ing step.
procedures quicker and easier.) Step 10:
Step 7: Step 8: 왘 Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
왘 To program the remaining two buttons, release the programmed integrated
왘 Locate “training” button on the garage
repeat the steps above starting with door opener motor head unit. signal transmitter button (2, 3
step 3. or 4).
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand. Step 11:
Depending on manufacturer, the “train- 왘 Press, hold for two seconds and re-
ing” button may also be referred to as lease same button a second time to
“learn”or “smart” button. If there is dif- complete the training process.
ficulty locating the transmitting button,
refer to the garage door opener opera- Some garage door openers (or other rolling
tor’s manual. code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.

262
Controls in detail
Useful features

Step 12: Gate operator/Canadian programming Step 4:


왘 Confirm the garage door operation by Canadian radio-frequency laws require 왘 Continue to press and hold the inte-
pressing the programmed integrated transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) grated signal transmitter button (2,
signal transmitter button (2, 3 after several seconds of transmission 3 or 4) while you press and re-press
or 4). which may not be long enough for the inte- (“cycle”) your hand-held remote con-
grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig- trol transmitter 6 every two seconds
Step 13:
nal during programming. Similar to this until the frequency signal has been
왘 To program the remaining two buttons, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators learned. Upon successful training, the
repeat the steps above starting with are designed to “time-out” in the same indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
step 3. manner. then rapidly after several seconds.
If you live in Canada or if you are having dif- 왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and
ficulties programming a gate operator (re- step 6 to complete.
gardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4 Operation of integrated remote control
with the following: 왘 Switch on ignition.
왘 Select and press the appropriate inte-
grated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote con-
trolled device.
The integrated remote control trans-
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.

263
Controls in detail
Useful features

Erasing the integrated remote control Reprogramming a single integrated


memory signal transmitter button
왘 Switch on ignition. To program a device using a signal trans-
mitter button previously trained, follow
왘 Simultaneously hold down the signal
these steps:
transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for ap-
proximately 20 seconds, until the indi- 왘 Press and hold the desired signal trans-
cator lamp 1 blinks rapidly. Do not mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not re-
hold for longer than 30 seconds. lease the button.
The codes of all three channels are 왘 The indicator lamp will begin to flash af-
erased. ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
i proceed with programming starting
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes with step 3.
of all three channels.

264
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care

265
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
왔 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle !
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- Additional instructions for AMG vehi-
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later cles:
on.
앫 During the first 1000 miles
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first (1500 km), do not exceed a speed
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫 During this period, avoid engine
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads speeds above 4500 rpm in each
(full throttle driving) and excessive en- gear.
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maxi-
mum rpm in each gear).
All of the above instructions, as may apply
앫 Avoid accelerating by kickdown. to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
down by shifting to a lower gear using the engine or the rear differential has been
the gear selector lever. replaced.

앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may
driving at moderate speeds (for hill gradually increase vehicle and engine
driving). speeds to the permissible maximum.

i
Always obey applicable speed limits.

266
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-


pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
앫 Keep tires at the recommended infla- tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or movement.
tion pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. and judgement. Power assistance
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use.
cident are greatly increased when you drink
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low or take drugs and drive. Warning! G
load use.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
With the engine not running, there is no
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or
power assistance for the brake and steering
eration. taking drugs.
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
앫 Have all maintenance work performed in mind that a considerably higher degree of
at the intervals specified in the Service effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
Booklet and as required by the FSS. hicle.
Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.

267
Operation
Driving instructions

Brakes To help prevent brake disk corrosion after If the parking brake is released and the
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the ter stays on, the brake fluid level in the res-
Warning! G vehicle with considerable force prior to ervoir is too low.
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
After driving in heavy rain for some time the brakes.
be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
without applying the brakes or through wa-
If your brake system is normally only sub- ervoir.
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
ject to moderate loads, you should occa-
the first braking action may be somewhat Have the brake system inspected immedi-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
reduced and increased pedal pressure may ately. Contact your authorized
brakes by applying above-normal braking
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- Mercedes-Benz Center.
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
enhance the grip of the brake pads. All checks and service work on the brake
in front.
system should be carried out by qualified
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will ! technicians only. Contact your authorized
cause excessive and premature wear of the Be very careful not to endanger other Mercedes-Benz Center.
brake pads. road users when you apply the brakes. Only install brake pads and brake fluid rec-
It can also result in the brakes overheating, Refer to the description of the Brake ommended by Mercedes-Benz.
thereby significantly reducing their effec- Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 77).
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.

268
Operation
Driving instructions

Driving off Parking


Warning! G
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after !
If other than recommended brake pads are driving off. Perform this procedure only
Set the parking brake whenever park-
installed, or other than recommended brake when the road is clear of other traffic.
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
Warm up the engine gradually. Do not move gear selector lever to position P.
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
place full load on the engine until the oper- When parking on hills, turn front wheels
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
ating temperature has been reached. towards the road curb.
could result in an accident.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex-
!
tended period. Doing so may cause serious Warning! G
When driving down long and steep damage to the drive train which is not cov-
grades, relieve the load on the brakes Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
by shifting into a lower gear to use the bustible materials such as grass, hay or
ranty.
engine’s braking power. This helps pre- leaves can come into contact with the hot
vent overheating of the brakes and re- ! exhaust system, as these materials could be
duces brake pad wear. Simultaneously depressing the acceler- ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive duces engine performance and causes
on for some time, rather than immediately premature brake wear and drivetrain
parking, so that the air stream can cool wear.
down the brakes faster.

269
Operation
Driving instructions

Tires Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by


Warning! G law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re- Warning! G come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
sult of inadvertent vehicle movement, be- mately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
fore turning off the engine and leaving the If you feel a sudden significant vibration or tire is considered worn and should be re-
vehicle always: ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- placed.
앫 Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal. ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. band across the tread.
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
앫 Move the gear selector lever to tion to an area which is a safe distance from
position P. the road. Warning! G
앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
wheels towards the road curb. cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
when the tread wear indicators (TWI) be-
앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re-
position 0 and remove, or press come visible at approximately 1/16 in
pairs.
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehi- (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*). low your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle adhesion properties on a wet road are
when leaving. sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.

270
Operation
Driving instructions

Specified tire pressures must be main- Tire traction Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
tained. This applies particularly if the tires radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
are subject to extreme operating condi- The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
tions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high icy road is always lower than on a dry road. wheels for the winter season to ensure
ambient temperatures). You should pay particular attention to the normal balanced handling characteristics.
condition of the road whenever the outside On packed snow, they can reduce your
temperatures are close to the freezing
Warning! G point.
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects considerably greater than when the road is
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You Warning! G not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap-
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued propriate caution.
driving with a flat tire or driving at high If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive will be substantially reduced. Under such
heat build-up and possibly a fire. weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Hydroplaning

Depending on the depth of the water layer


on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.

271
Operation
Driving instructions

Tire speed rating CLK 320 CLK 500


Your vehicle is factory equipped with Your vehicle is factory equipped with
Regardless of the tire rating, local speed
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driv-
of 130 mph (210 km/h) or with “W”-rated of 186 mph (300 km/h).
ing speeds appropriate to prevailing condi-
tires*, which have a speed rating of
tions. An electronic speed limiter prevents your
168 mph (270 km/h).
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
An electronic speed limiter prevents your 130 mph (210 km/h).
Warning! G vehicle from exceeding a speed of
Even when permitted by law, never operate
130 mph (210 km/h). CLK 55 AMG
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi- Your vehicle is factory equipped with
mum speed rating of the tires.
CLK 320 with Appearance Package* “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
Exceeding the maximum speed for which Your vehicle is factory equipped with of 186 mph (300 km/h).
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail- “W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos- of 168 mph (270 km/h).
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
sibly resulting in an accident and/or An electronic speed limiter prevents your 155 mph (250 km/h).
personal injury and possible death, for you vehicle from exceeding a speed of
and for others. 130 mph (210 km/h). i
For information on tire speed rating for
winter tires, see “Winter tires”
(컄 page 294).

272
Operation
Driving instructions

Winter driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G
The most important rule for slippery or icy force may become necessary to produce
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid the normal braking effect. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
Depressing the brake pedal periodically and from around the vehicle with the engine
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
when traveling at length on salt-strewn running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox-
system under such conditions.
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior re-
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, efficiency back to normal. sulting in unconsciousness and death.
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
If the vehicle is parked after being driven To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien- open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
rective steering action.
cy should be tested as soon as possible af- hicle not facing the wind.
i ter driving is resumed.
For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” Warning G Warning! G
(컄 page 295).
Make sure not to endanger any other road The outside temperature indicator is not de-
users when carrying out these braking ma- signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
Warning! G neuvers. is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift ing point do not guarantee that the road
in order to obtain braking action. This could surface is free of ice.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- For more information, see “Winter driving”
vent this type of control loss. (컄 page 294).

273
Operation
Driving instructions

Standing water Passenger compartment Driving abroad

! Abroad, there is an extensive


Do not drive through flooded areas or Warning! G Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
water of unknown depth. Before driving
Always fasten items being carried as secure- which are not listed in the index of your
through water, determine its depth.
ly as possible. Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
Never accelerate before driving into
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- should request pertinent information from
water. The bow wave could force water
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
ment, thus damaging them. around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
If you must drive through standing wa- securely fastened in the vehicle.
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob-
or the engine compartment. Water in jects.
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake, causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
age is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

274
Operation
Driving instructions

Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios Catalytic converter
mitters
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
Warning! G monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
COMAND*, radio and telephone* important element in conjunction with the
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
Please do not forget that your primary re- operating condition by following our rec-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. ommended maintenance instructions as
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man- outlined in your Service Booklet.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
agement and Data System), radio or tele-
personal injury. !
phone1 if road, traffic and weather
conditions permit. To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- verters, only use premium unleaded
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
phone or a citizens band unit should only gasoline in this vehicle.
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
covering a distance of approximately Any noticeable irregularities in engine
nected to an antenna that is installed on
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec- operation should be dealt with prompt-
the outside of the vehicle.
ond. ly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
1
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in- may reach the catalytic converter,
Observe all legal requirements.
structions regarding use of an external an- causing it to overheat and start a fire.
tenna.

275
Operation
Driving instructions

Emission control
Warning! G Warning! G
Certain systems of the engine serve to
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- keep the toxic components of the exhaust Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- gases within permissible limits required by your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
ble materials such as grass, hay, or leaves law. monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
can come into contact with the hot exhaust sciousness and lead to death.
These systems, of course, will function
system, as these materials could be ignited Do not run the engine in confined areas
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
and cause a vehicle fire. (such as a garage) which are not properly
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
justments to the engine should therefore ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
be carried out only by qualified fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni- have the cause determined and corrected
cians. immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
Engine adjustments should not be altered fully open at all times.
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly accord-
ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing require-
ments. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.

276
Operation
Driving instructions

Coolant temperature
Warning! G
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- 앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
perature may rise close to approx. 248°F heated can cause some fluids, which
(120°C). may have leaked into the engine com-
partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
The engine should not be operated with riously burned.
the coolant temperature over 248°F 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en- cause serious burns and can occur just
gine damage which is not covered by the by opening the hood. Stay away from
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

277
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling 왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
Warning! G
왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. to it until possible pressure is released.
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
왘 Take off the cap and set it in the recess
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
on the fuel filler flap.
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
flame or smoking materials near gasoline! 왘 Turn the engine off into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could 앫 by turning the SmartKey to
result in personal injury. 왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
position 0. Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch. unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
The fuel filler flap is located on the 앫 by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the start/stop button. Open the driv-
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with er’s door (with driver’s door open,
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with starter switch is now in position 0,
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/un- same as with SmartKey removed
locks the fuel filler flap. from starter switch).

278
Operation
At the gas station

i i
Warning! G Only use premium unleaded gasoline Leaving the engine running and the fuel
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating cap open can cause the ? lamp to
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). illuminate.
sure in the system which could cause a gas
Information on gasoline quality can More information can be found in the
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
normally be found on the fuel pump. “Practical hints” section (컄 page 308).
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
zle, which could cause personal injury. More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the Products pamphlet.
right.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tight-
ened.
왘 Close the fuel filler flap.

279
Operation
At the gas station

Check regularly and before a long trip ! Engine oil level


If you find that the brake fluid in the More information on engine oil
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the (컄 page 283).
minimum mark or below, have the
Opening hood (컄 page 281).
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately. Noti-
Vehicle lighting
fy an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately. Do not add brake fluid as Check function and cleanliness.For more
this will not solve the problem. For information on replacing light bulbs, see
more information, see also “Practical “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 350).
hints” (컄 page 307). Exterior lamp switch (컄 page 47)
1 Coolant level
More information on coolant can be Tire inflation pressure
found in the “Operation” section on
More information on tire inflate pressure
(컄 page 286).
(컄 page 292).
2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)
Removing fuse box cover (컄 page 373)

3 Windshield washer and headlamp


cleaning system
More information on refilling the reser-
voir can be found in the “Operation”
section on (컄 page 289).

280
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood 왘 Pull lever 1 downwards. 왘 Push lever 2 under the hood upwards.
The hood is unlocked. 왘 Pull up on the hood and then release it.
Warning! G ! The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- struts.
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
wiper arms are folded forward away
be forced open by passing air flow.
from the windshield. Warning! G
Opening To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or may even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades. 컄컄
2 Lever for opening the hood
1 Hood lock release

281
Operation
Engine compartment

컄컄 Closing
Warning! G Warning! G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the The engine is equipped with a transistorized Warning! G
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- ignition system. Because of the high voltage
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
away from the vehicle and do not open the socket) of the ignition system
hood until the engine has cooled. If neces- 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of ap-
앫 with the engine running
sary, call the fire department. proximately 1 ft (30 cm).
앫 while starting the engine
The hood will lock audibly.
앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually 왘 Make sure the hood is fully closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.

282
Operation
Engine compartment

Engine oil Checking engine oil level with the con- The standard display (컄 page 129) should
trol system appear in the multifunction display.
The amount of oil your engine needs will
When checking the oil level the vehicle 왘 Press buttonk or j on the
depend on a number of factors, including
must steering wheel until the following
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
message is seen in the multifunction
occur when 앫 be parked on level ground
display:
앫 the vehicle is new 앫 be at normal operating temperature
Engine oil level
앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at high- 앫 have been stationary for at least five Measuring now!
er engine speeds minutes with the engine turned off Measurement
Engine oil consumption checks should only To check the engine oil level via the correct
be made after the vehicle break-in period. multifunction display, do the following: only if veh. level

왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch


i
to position 2 or press the
Do not use any special lubricant addi-
KEYLESS GO* start/stop button twice.
tives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz will
restrict your warranty entitlement. One of the following messages will
More information on this subject is subsequently appear in the indicator:
available at any Mercedes-Benz 앫 Engine oil level
Center. ok
앫 Add 1.0 qt.
to reach max. oil level!
(Canada: 1.0 liter) 컄컄

283
Operation
Engine compartment

컄컄 앫 Add 1.5 qt. Other display messages If you see the message:
to reach max. oil level!
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2 Engine oil level
(Canada: 1.5 liter) in the starter switch, the following Not when engine on!
message will appear:
앫 Add 2.0 qt. 왘 Turn off the engine.
to reach max. oil level! Turn on ignition
왘 If the engine is at normal operating
to see engine oil level!
(Canada: 2.0 liter) temperature, wait five minutes before
왘 Switch on the ignition. checking oil.
i
If you see the message: 왘 If the engine is not yet at normal
If you want to interrupt the checking
operating temperature, you must wait
procedure, press the k or j Observe waiting time
30 minutes before checking oil.
button on the multifunction steering 왘 If engine is at normal operating
wheel. temperature, wait five minutes before If there is excess engine oil with the engine
repeating check procedure. at normal operating temperature, the
왘 If necessary, add engine oil. following message will appear:
왘 If engine is not yet at normal operating
For adding engine oil see (컄 page 285). Engine oil level
temperature, wait 30 minutes before
Reduce oil level!
More information on engine oil can be repeating check procedure.
found in the “Technical data” section 왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained
(컄 page 388) and (컄 page 390). off. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

284
Operation
Engine compartment

! Adding engine oil


Excess oil must be siphoned or drained !
off. It could cause damage to the
Only use approved engine oils. For a
engine and catalytic converter not
listing of a approved engine oils, refer
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
to the Factory Approved Service Prod-
Warranty.
ucts pamphlet in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
More information on messages in the
display concerning engine oil can be found In addition, check the oil filler cap for
in the “Practical hints” section important information pertaining to the
(컄 page 326). engine oil needing to meet a specific 1 Filler cap
Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB 왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
229.5). If such information is printed Be careful not to overfill with oil.
on the oil filler cap, only use an engine
왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful
oil from the list of approved engine oils
in the Factory Approved Service Prod- not to overfill with oil.
ucts pamphlet that meets the specifi- Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
cation indicated on the oil filler cap. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
Using engine oils of other specification entering the ground or water. 컄컄
may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter-
mine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

285
Operation
Engine compartment

컄컄 ! Transmission fluid level Coolant


Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the en- The transmission fluid level does not need The engine coolant is a mixture of water
gine and catalytic converter not cov- to be checked. If you notice transmission and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, the coolant level, the vehicle must be
Warranty. have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center parked on level ground and the engine
check the automatic transmission. must be cool.
왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compart-
More information on engine oil can be
ment.
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 388) and (컄 page 390).

286
Operation
Engine compartment

The coolant level is correct if the level


Warning! G 앫 for cold coolant: reaches the black top
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: part of the reservoir

앫 Use extreme caution when opening the 앫 for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
hood if there are any signs of steam or (1.5 cm) higher
coolant leaking from the cooling system, 왘 Add coolant as required.
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated. 왘 Replace and tighten cap.
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant More information on coolant can be found
reservoir if engine temperature is above 1 Coolant expansion tank in the “Technical data” section
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool (컄 page 392).
왘 Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under imately one half turn to the left to re-
pressure. lease any excess pressure.
앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- 왘 Continue turning the cap to the left and
imately 1⁄2 turn to relieve excess pres- remove it.
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.

287
Operation
Engine compartment

Battery
G Observe E Wear eye protection.
all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
Your vehicle’s battery is located on the
automotive batteries.
C
right side of the engine compartment. Keep children away.

A Risk of explosion
The battery should always be sufficiently

F
charged in order to achieve its rated ser- Follow the instructions in this

D
vice life. Refer to Service Booklet for bat- Keep flames or sparks away Operator's Manual.
tery maintenance intervals. from battery. Do not smoke.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
B
If you use your vehicle mostly for Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly.
short-distance trips, you will need to have Recycling of batteries is the preferred
the battery charge checked more frequent- with skin, eyes or clothing.
method of disposal. Many states require
ly. In case it does, immediately sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
When replacing the battery, always use flush affected area with clear for recycling.
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. water and seek medical help if
necessary.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.

288
Operation
Engine compartment

Windshield washer system and During all seasons, add MB Windshield i


headlamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Pre-mix The windshield washer system on this
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable vehicle is heated, so a fluid mixture pro-
The windshield washer reservoir is located container. duced to resist freezing at tempera-
in the engine compartment.
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield tures of approximately 14°F (–10°C)
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or should be sufficient.
commercially available premixed wind-
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
pending on ambient temperatures). Warning! G
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
where temperatures may fall below the
mable. Do not spill washer
freezing point. Failure to do so could re-
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be-
sult in damage to the washer sys-
cause it may ignite and burn. You could be
tem/reservoir.
seriously burned.
1 Washer fluid reservoir
!
Fluid for the windshield washer system and Only use washer fluid which is suitable For more information, see “Windshield
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied for plastic lenses. Improper washer flu- washer system and headlamp cleaning
from the windshield washer reservoir. It id can damage the plastic lenses of the system*” (컄 page 394).
has a capacity of approx. 6.4 US qt (6 l). headlamps.

289
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-
Center for information on tested and rec- Warning! G mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
ommended rims and tires for summer and damage cannot always be recognized on
winter operation. They can also offer ad- Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
vice concerning tire service and purchase. tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
sustained damage, replace them. cle when such tires are used.
Warning! G When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
Replace rims or tires with the same designa- particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
original part. See your authorized accident.
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension compo-
nents can be damaged.
앫 The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and tires is no longer guaran-
teed.

290
Operation
Tires and wheels

Important guidelines Life of tires Direction of rotation

앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advantag-
same type and make. various factors including but not limited to: es, such as better hydroplaning perfor-
mance. To benefit, however, you must
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the 앫 Driving style
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
rim.
앫 Tire pressure specified.
앫 Break in new tires for approximately 앫 Distance driven An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in-
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
tended direction of tire rotation.
speeds.
앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
Warning! G
damage. Dented or bend rims can Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
cause tire pressure loss and damage six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
the tire beads.
앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire !
pressure and correct as required.
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down place with as little exposure to light as
too far. Adhesion properties on wet possible. Protect tires from contact
roads are sharply reduced at tread with oil, grease and gasoline.
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).

291
Operation
Tires and wheels

Checking tire inflation pressure i


The pressures listed for light loads are
Warning! G
minimum values offering high driving
Warning! G comfort.
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly: Increased inflation pressures listed for can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
heavier loads may also be used for light
앫 Check the tires for punctures from for- cause they are more likely to become punc-
eign objects. loads. These higher pressures produce tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
favorable handling characteristics. The etc.
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
the valves or from around the rim. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
Correct the tire pressure only when tires min. values listed in the fuel filler flap. and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
are cold. from being overheated.

Regularly check your tire pressure at inter- Tire pressure changes by approximately Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
vals of no more than 14 days. 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
temperature change. Keep this in mind ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
If the tires are warm you should only cor- door opening). Overloading the tires can
when checking tire pressure where the
rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur- overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
temperature is different from the outside
rent operating conditions.
temperature.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec- Check the spare tire periodically for condi-
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
ified tire inflation pressures for warm and tion and inflation. Spare tires will age and
increased while driving, depending on the
cold tires as well as for various operating become worn over time even if never used,
driving speed and the tire load.
conditions. and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.

292
Operation
Tires and wheels

Rotating wheels
Warning! G
Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are loose if not tightened with a torque of
of the same size. 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
On vehicles with the same wheel size all bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
sooner if necessary, according to the de-
gree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and en-
sure proper tire inflation pressure.

293
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi- Winter tires Always observe the speed rating of the
cle winterized at an authorized winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service in- Always use winter tires at temperatures maximum speed for which your tires are
cludes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef- where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
concentration.
fectiveness of the ABS and the ESP in win- tices are available at your tire dealer or any
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the ter operation. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
water of the windshield and headlamp
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
winter tires are of the same make and have Warning! G
the same tread design.
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
for temperatures below freezing point
(컄 page 394). Warning! G are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops very well impair turning stability and that
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
with decreasing ambient temperature. overall driving stability may be reduced.
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
A well charged battery helps to ensure Adapt your driving style accordingly.
er suitable for winter operation.
that the engine can be started even at
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
low ambient temperatures.
tire at the nearest authorized
앫 Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom- Mercedes-Benz Center.
mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.

294
Operation
Winter driving

Block heater* Snow chains 앫 Only use snow chains that are ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
(Canada only) Snow chains should only be driven on rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
The engine is equipped with a block heat- snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex- glad to advise you on this subject.
er. ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
as soon as possible when driving on roads
The electrical cable may be installed at depending on location. Always check
without snow.
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. local and state laws before installing
i snow chains.
When driving with snow chains, you !
may wish to deactivate the ESP
Use of snow chains is not permissible
(컄 page 79) before setting the vehicle
with tire sizes:
in motion. This will improve the vehi-
cle‘s traction. 앫 225/50 R16 92H
앫 245/40 R17 91W
Please observe the following guidelines
앫 245/40 R17 91Y
when using snow chains:
앫 T 125/80 R17 99M
앫 Using snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations. 앫 T 125/90 R 16 98M
앫 Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufac-
turer's mounting instructions.

295
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Clearing the service indicator
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with The service indicator is automatically
the Service Booklet at the times called for cleared after 30 seconds. You can also
by the FSS (Flexible Service System). clear it yourself.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in 왘 Press the reset button on the instru-
accordance with the Service Booklet at the The type of service due is indicated in the ment cluster (컄 page 126).
designated times/mileage called for by multifunction display:
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not Service term exceeded
9 Minor service (A)
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. ´ Major service (B) If you have exceeded the suggested ser-
vice term, you will see the following mes-
FSS will notify you when your next service i sage in the multifunction display:
is due. The interval between services depends Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles
Approximately one month before your next on your driving habits. A gentle driving (km)
service is due, one of the following mes- style, moderate engine speeds and the Service A exceeded by XXX days
sages will appear in the multifunction dis- avoidance of short-distance trips will Service A exceeded by X day
play while you are driving or when you lengthen the interval between services.
switch on the ignition (example service A): An acoustic signal will also sound.
Service A in XXXXX miles (km) The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
Service A in XXX days service indicator following a completed
Service A in X day service.
Service A due now!

296
Operation
Maintenance

Calling up the service indicator Resetting the service indicator 왘 To confirm, press reset button until you
hear a signal.
왘 Switch on ignition. In the event that the service on your vehi-
The service indicator now displays the
cle is not carried out by an authorized
The standard display of the control sys- reset interval.
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
tem appears (컄 page 129).
service indicator yourself. i
왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
왘 Switch on ignition. If the service indicator was inadvertent-
tifunction steering wheel until FSS indi-
cator with the service symbol 9 or The standard display of the control sys- ly reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center
´ and the service deadline appears tem appears (컄 page 129). correct it.
in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button k or j on the mul- Only reset if the proper service has
tifunction steering wheel until the FSS been performed. Resetting the system
i without performing proper service as
indicator with the service symbol 9
If the battery is disconnected, the days called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
or ´ and the service deadline ap-
of disconnection will not be included in to incorrectly determine the next ser-
pears in the multifunction display.
the count shown by the service indica- vice interval which will result in engine
tor. To arrive at the true service dead- 왘 Press reset button to the left in the in- damage not covered by the
line, you will need to subtract these strument cluster for about three sec- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
days from the days shown in the ser- onds.
vice indicator. This message appears in the multifunc-
Do not confuse the service indicator tion display:
with the engine oil level indicator :. Service interval...
To reset:
Press reset button
for 3 seconds

297
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle Such damage is caused not only by ex- More frequent washings are necessary to
treme and varying climatic conditions, but deal with unfavorable conditions:
also by:
앫 near the ocean
Warning! G 앫 Air pollution
앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. 앫 Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
앫 Tar 앫 during winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- diately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
signed for cleaning your vehicle. 앫 Grease and oil
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
앫 Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- 앫 Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
앫 Brake fluid
tack the paintwork as well as the aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
underbody and cause lasting damage. 앫 Bird droppings Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
앫 Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
앫 Tree resins, etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.

298
Operation
Vehicle care

We have selected car-care products and Power washer Tar stains


compiled recommendations which are
When using a power washer for cleaning Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
specially matched to our vehicles and
the vehicle, always observe the manufac- and become more difficult to remove. A tar
which always reflect the latest technology.
turer’s operating instructions. remover is recommended.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized i Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
should be applied when water drops on the
damage due to negligent or incorrect care water, and a SmartKey with
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
cannot always be removed or repaired with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
every three to five months, depending on
the car-care products recommended here. within approx. 3 ft (approx. 1 m), the
climate and washing detergent used.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your vehicle could be inadvertently locked
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. or unlocked. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
The following topics deal with the cleaning shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
and care of your vehicle and give important !
gloss).
“how-to” information as well as references Never use a round nozzle to
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod- power-wash tires. The intense jet of Do not apply any of these products or wax
ucts. water can result in damage to the tire. if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Additional information can be found in the Always replace a damaged tire.
booklet “Vehicle Care Guide“. Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
Always keep the jet of water moving
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
across the surface. Do not aim directly
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
cle doors, etc.).
tors, seals, or other rubber parts.

299
Operation
Vehicle care

Engine cleaning Vehicle washing i


Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
make sure to protect electrical compo- in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
nents and connectors from the intrusion of detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap- water, and a SmartKey with
water and cleaning agents. proved Car Shampoo. KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approx. 3 ft (approx. 1 m), the
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor- Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
vehicle could be inadvertently locked
rosion Wax, should be applied to the en- fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
or unlocked.
gine compartment after every engine spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
cleaning. Before applying, all control link- plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
age bushings and joints should be lubricat- chamois frequently. Ornamental moldings
ed. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
be protected from any wax. with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
agents to dry on the finish. er.

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in out- Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
side mirrors prior to running the vehicle turn signal lenses
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors. Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces with plenty of water.
of road salt as soon as possible.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
When washing the underbody, do not for- force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
get to clean the inner sides of the wheels. cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.

300
Operation
Vehicle care

Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor Cleaning the Parktronic* system To prevent scratches, never apply strong
cover sensors force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.

1 Distronic* system sensor cover 1 Parktronic* system sensors


왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
poo, with plenty of water to clean sen- poo, with plenty of water to clean
sor cover 1. sensors 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong When using a steam cleaner or power
force and only use a soft, non-scratchy washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min-
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do imum distance of 4 in (10 cm) at
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a sensors 1.
dry cloth or sponge.

301
Operation
Vehicle care

Wiper blades Window cleaning !


왘 Fold wiper arm forward until it snaps 왘 Fold wiper arm forward until it snaps Fold the windshield wiper arms back
into place. into place. onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Warning! G Warning! G Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- of the impact from the tensioning
move SmartKey from starter switch before move SmartKey from starter switch before spring could crack the windshield.
cleaning the wiper blades. Otherwise the cleaning the windshield. Otherwise the wip-
wiper motor might suddenly turn on and er motor might suddenly turn on and cause
cause injury. injury.

왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a 왘 Use a window cleaning solution on all
clean cloth and detergent solution. glass surfaces.

! An automotive glass cleaner is recom-


mended.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.

302
Operation
Vehicle care

Light alloy wheels Steering wheel and gear selector lever Seat belts
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly The webbing must not be treated with
should be used for regular cleaning of the or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear,
light alloy wheels. Leather Care. lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Cup holder (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
of water. mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Warning! G
Follow instructions on container. washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
i scouring agents. severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage Hard plastic trim items
the clear coat. Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
Instrument cluster with light pressure.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
Headliner and rear window shelf
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
scouring agents. dirt.

303
Operation
Vehicle care

Upholstery Nubuck leather upholstery Plastic and rubber parts


(CLK 55 AMG)
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
clothing that have the tendency to give off The nubuck leather upholstery is treated
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause with a protective coating. Wipe nubuck Wood trims
the upholstery to become permanently dis- leather upholstery with damp microfiber
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
colored. By lining the seats with a proper cloth to remove dust and other light stains.
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration Carefully dab nubuck leather upholstery
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
will be prevented. with a microfiber cloth to remove oil stains.
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
! these may be abrasive.
Leather upholstery
Do not use Mercedes-Benz approved
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
Leather Care or any solvents to clean
and dry thoroughly or clean with
nubuck leather upholstery.
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per- Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leath-
forated leather as its underside should not er upholstery.
become wet.

304
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Where will I find...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses

305
Practical hints
What to do if …?
왔 What to do if …?
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to to position 2, have it checked and replaced
come on during the bulb self-check when if necessary.

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


- The yellow ABS malfunction The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
indicator lamp comes on while switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also Wheels will lock during hard braking,
driving. switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
but without the ABS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
왘 Read and observe messages in the
display (컄 page 314).
The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value
10 volts. The ABS has switched off. again, the ABS is operational again.
왘 If necessary, have the generator (al-
ternator) and battery checked.

306
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


; (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake
(컄 page 46).
3 (Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
comes on while driving. voir. vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.

!
Warning! G Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re-
sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine If you find that the brake fluid in the
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
can be seriously burned. minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.

307
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


? The yellow “CHECK ENGINE” There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as
malfunction indicator lamp possible by an authorized
앫 The fuel management system
comes on while driving. Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is
앫 The emission control system used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system.
앫 Systems which impact emissions It allows the accurate identification of
Such malfunctions may result in excessive system malfunctions through the read-
emissions values and may switch the engine out of diagnostic trouble codes. It is lo-
to its Limp-Home Mode (emergency opera- cated in the front left area of the
tion). footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly. 왘 Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty. 왘 After refuelling, start the engine three or
four times in succession.
The Limp-Home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.

308
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


• The red coolant warning lamp There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Add coolant to prevent engine from
comes on when the engine is overheating (컄 page 286).
running.
If this warning lamp comes on frequently, 왘 Have the cooling system checked.
there is a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra- 왘 If the coolant temperature is below
diator fan may be broken. 257°F (125°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
• The red coolant warning lamp The coolant temperature has exceeded 왘 Stop as soon as possible and allow
comes on while driving and you 257°F (125°C). the engine and coolant to cool down.
hear a warning sound.

Warning! G Steam from an overheated engine can cause


serious burns and can occur just by opening
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
Driving when your engine is badly overheat- the hood. Stay away from the engine if you engine has cooled down.
ed can cause some fluids which may have see or hear steam coming from it.
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

309
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


l The red Distance warning lamp You are too close to the vehicle in front of you 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to in-
comes on while driving. to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance.
l The red Distance warning lamp 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you ahead of you.
왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
hear a warning sound.
앫 The distance warning system has recog- You may need to brake or maneuver
nized a stationary obstacle on your prob- to avoid hitting an obstacle.
able line of travel.
v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP is deactivated. 왘 Switch the ESP back on (컄 page 80).
comes on while driving.
Risk of accident! If the ESP cannot be switched back on,
have the system checked at an autho-
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
ing road and weather conditions.
possible.

310
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP or traction control has come into 왘 When driving off, apply as little throt-
flashes while driving. operation because of detected traction loss tle as possible.
in at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the acceler-
Distronic* is deactivated. ator.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (컄 page 79).
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
A The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp comes on while mark. (컄 page 278).
driving.
< The red seat belt non-usage The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
warning lamp illuminates briefly belts.
after starting the engine.

311
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


1 The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
comes on while driving. tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
device (ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or ter.
fail to activate in an accident.

Warning! G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily, which could result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.

312
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Lamp in center console

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution


TM1
PASS. AIRBAG OFF A BabySmart child seat is installed on the 왘 Have the system checked as soon as
The indicator lamp comes on. front passenger seat. Therefore the passen- possible by an authorized
ger front airbag is switched off. Mercedes-Benz Center.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
PASS. AIRBAG OFF The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure there is nothing between
The indicator lamp does not seat cushion and child seat and check
come on with a BabySmartTM installation of the child seat.
child seat properly installed on
왘 If the light remains out, have the sys-
the front passenger seat.
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been
repaired.
1
BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

313
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Messages in the display i


Warning! G Turning the SmartKey in starter switch
The control system shows warning and
to position 2, or pressing the
malfunction messages in the multifunction All categories of messages contain impor-
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
display. tant information which should be taken note
to position 2 causes all lamps as well
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad-
Certain warning and malfunction messag- as the multifunction display to come
dressed as soon as possible at an autho-
es are accompanied by an audible signal. on. Ensure that they are all in working
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Address these messages accordingly and order before starting your journey.
Failure to repair the condition noted may
follow the additional instructions given in cause damage not covered by the
this Operator’s Manual. On the pages that follow, you will find a
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result
compilation of the most important warning
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in in property damage or personal injury.
and malfunction messages that may ap-
the control system (컄 page 138) displays pear in the display. High priority messages
both cleared and uncleared messages. appear on a red background.
High-priority messages appear in the mul- Warning! G
tifunction display in red color.
No messages will be displayed if either the
Certain messages of high priority cannot instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
be cleared from the multifunction display play is inoperative.
using the reset button (컄 page 126).
Contact your nearest authorized
Other high priority messages and messag- Mercedes-Benz Center.
es of less immediate priority (regular dis-
play colors) can be cleared from the
multifunction display using the reset but-
ton and are then stored in the malfunction
message memory (컄 page 138).

314
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Text messages

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution


ABS Anti-lock The charging voltage has fallen below 왘 When the voltage is above this value
braking system 10 volts and the ABS has switched off. again, the ABS is operational again.
not working!
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
mally but without the ABS available. Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
Defective! The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are Wheels will lock during hard braking,
also deactivated. reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
mally but without the ABS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.

315
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution


ABS Display defective! The ABS or the ABS display is malfunc- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! tioning. Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
BAS Defective! The BAS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop switched off. 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
Display defective BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning. 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.

316
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution


BAS not available The charging voltage has fallen below 왘 When the voltage is above this value
See operator’s manual 10 volts and the BAS has switched off. again, the BAS is operational again.
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
mally but without the BAS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
Cruise Con- Visit workshop! Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunc- 왘 Have cruise control or Distronic*
trol tioning. checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Distronic External interference Distronic* is switched off and is tempo- 왘 Try activating Distronic* again later.
Reactivate! rarily unavailable.
Currently unavailable! Distronic* is switched off because the 왘 Clean the Distronic* cover in the radi-
see oper. manual Distronic* cover in the radiator grille is ator grille (컄 page 301).
dirty.
왘 Restart the vehicle.
Visit workshop! Distronic* is malfunctioning or the display 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
is malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.

317
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution


ESP Defective! The ESP was deactivated because of a 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! malfunction or interrupted power supply.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The ABS might not be operational.
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
Display defective The ESP or the ESP display is malfunction- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! ing. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
not available! The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value
See operator’s manual 10 volts and the ESP has switched off. again, the ESP is operational again.
왘 If necessary, have the generator (al-
ternator) and battery checked.
The self-diagnosis has not been complet- The display will clear after driving a short
ed. distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

318
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution


P Selector lever You have turned off the engine with the 왘 Place the gear selector lever in
in park position KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in gear position P.
selector lever position N and opened the
driver’s door.
or
You have attempted to switch off the en-
gine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button while the gear selector lever was in
position R or D.
Please move You have attempted to start the engine 왘 Place the gear selector lever in
selector lever to P with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button position P or N.
or N while the gear selector lever was in
position R or D.

319
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Symbol messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


# Undervoltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 43).
Charge battery
Undervoltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Turn off unnecessary electrical con-
Switch off sumers.
consumers
VISIT WORKSHOP! The battery was charged with a battery 왘 Have the battery checked at a service
charger or jump started. station.

The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop immediately and check the


Possible causes: poly-V-belt.
앫 alternator malfunctioning If it is broken:
앫 broken poly-V-belt 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
Do not forget that the brake system re-
operative water pump which may re-
quires electrical energy and may be oper-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify an
ating with restricted capability.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is in- If it is intact:
creased.
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Ad-
just driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.

320
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon
Visit workshop limit. as possible.
; (USA only) Parking brake You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake
release brake! (컄 page 46).
! (Canada only)
; (USA only) Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the res- 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
Visit workshop ervoir. notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
3 (Canada only)
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.

! !
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the Brake pad thickness must be visually
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the checked by a qualified technician at the
Driving with this message displayed can re-
minimum mark or below, have the intervals specified in the Service Book-
sult in an accident. Have your brake system
brake system checked for brake pad let.
checked immediately. Do not add brake flu-
thickness and leaks.
id before checking the brake system. Over-
filling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be se-
riously burned.

321
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


? Visit workshop! There may be a malfunction in the 왘 Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
앫 fuel injection system
ter.
앫 ignition system
앫 exhaust system
앫 fuel system
B Coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 286).
Check level
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!
Warning! G Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
the message and symbol displayed
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat, causing major en-
gine damage.

322
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


Ï Coolant The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle and turn off the en-
Stop, engine off! gine.
왘 Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could other-
wise damage the engine.

!
Warning! G Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the The engine should not be operated with
engine has cooled down. the coolant temperature above 248°F
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
ed can cause some fluids which may have
During severe operating conditions and engine damage which is not covered by
leaked into the engine compartment to
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.

323
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


Ï Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop immediately and check the
Stop, engine off! poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolant The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature dis-
Visit workshop tioning. play.
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as pos-
sible.

324
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


G Display defective The instrument cluster display is malfunc- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! tioning.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
The displays for several systems have 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
malfunctioned. Some systems them- by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
selves may also have malfunctioned. ter.
± Display defective Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
Visit workshop! relay information to the control system. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
The following systems may have failed: ter.
앫 Coolant temperature display
앫 Tachometer
앫 Cruise control display
J Doors open! You are attempting to drive with one or 왘 Close the doors.
more doors open.

325
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


: USA only: The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 285) and check
Add 1 qt. engine oil the engine oil level (컄 page 283).
when next refueling
Canada only:
Add 1 liter engine oil
when next refueling
Engine oil level You have added too much engine oil. 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off. Ob-
Reduce oil level! There is a risk of damaging the engine or serve all legal requirements with re-
the catalytic converter. spect to its disposal.
Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine. There is a 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
Stop, engine off! danger of engine damage. soon as possible.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 285) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 283).

326
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


: Engine oil It may be that there is water in the engine 왘 Have the engine oil checked.
Visit workshop! oil.
Engine oil level The engine oil has dropped to a critical 왘 Check the engine oil level
Visit workshop! level. (컄 page 283) and add oil as required
(컄 page 285).
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

When the message Add 1 qt. engine oil When this occurs, the warning will first !
when next refueling (Canada: 1 liter) come on intermittently and then stay on if The engine oil level warnings should
appears while the engine is running and at the oil level drops further. not be ignored. Extended driving with
operating temperature, the engine oil level the symbol displayed could result in
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
has dropped to approximately the serious engine damage that is not
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest ser-
minimum level. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
vice station where the engine oil should be
topped to the required level with an ap- Warranty.
proved oil.

327
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


A Reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped below the re- 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
serve mark. (컄 page 278).
Y Hood open! You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 282).
I Remove key You have forgotten to remove the 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start-
SmartKey. er switch.
Replace key! No additional code available for SmartKey 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Center as soon as possible.
Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter- 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 345).
Check battery! ies are discharged.
Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
not recognized! recognized while the engine is running be- do so.
cause 왘 Search for the SmartKey.
앫 the SmartKey is not in the vehicle
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
앫 there is strong radio-frequency inter- locked nor can the engine be started
ference again after the engine has been stopped.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey
mentarily not recognized. in the vehicle.
왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey
in the starter switch if necessary.

328
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


I Key recognized A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the 왘 Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
in vehicle vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
Keyless Go The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Check system ing. Center as soon as possible.
Key This display appears (for a maximum of 왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
do not forget key 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened 왘 Take the SmartKey with
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving
in the starter switch. the vehicle.
Message is only a reminder.
. 3rd stop lamp The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tioning. Center as soon as possible.
Back- up lamp, left The left backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Back- up lamp, right The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Display defective! The display for the lamps or the system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop! malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp, left The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Front foglamp, right The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

329
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


. High beam, left The left high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
High beam, right The right high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
Lamp sensor The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The 왘 In the control system, set lamp opera-
Visit workshop! headlamps switch on automatically. tion to manual (컄 page 145).
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exteri-
or lamp switch.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
License plate lamp. The left license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left ing.
License plate lamp, The right license plate lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right tioning.
Low beam, left The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Low beam, right The right low beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
ing. Center as soon as possible.

330
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


. Parking lamp, The left parking lamps are malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
front left A backup bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Substitute lamp on
Parking lamp, The right parking lamps are malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
front right ing. A backup bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Substitute lamp on
Side marker lamp, The front left side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
front left tioning.
Side marker lamp The front right side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
front right functioning.
Stop lamp, left The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Stop lamp, right The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Stop lamp Stop lamp illumination is delayed or lamp 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop! is permanently on. Center as soon as possible.
Tail lamp, left The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Substitute lamp on! backup bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Tail lamp, right The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Substitute lamp on! backup bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.

331
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


. Turn off lamps! Lamps have been turned on although the 왘 Turn off the headlamps.
SmartKey in the starter switch is in posi-
tion 0.
Turn signal front left The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute lamp on! tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn signal front right The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute lamp on! tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn signal in The left turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
left mirror malfunctioning. This message will only ap- possible.
pear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Turn signal in The right turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
right mirror malfunctioning. This message will only ap- possible.
pear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Turn signal rear left The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute lamp on! tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn signal rear right The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substitute lamp on! tioning. A backup bulb is being used.

332
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


< Driver’s seat belt The display reminds you and your passen- 왘 Fasten the seat belts.
Fasten seat belt! gers to fasten seat belts.
Front passenger The display reminds you and your passen- 왘 Fasten the seat belts.
seat belt gers to fasten seat belts.
Please fasten belt!
Seat belt system The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop Center as soon as possible.

333
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


L defective One or more main functions of the Tele 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
Visit workshop! Aid system are malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tele Aid battery The emergency power battery for the 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
Visit workshop! Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
vehicle battery is also dead, Tele Aid will
not be operational.
1 Restraint system The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
defective est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Visit workshop!

Warning! G SRS may not be activated when needed in


an accident, which could result in serious or
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi- fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be and unnecessarily which could also result in
operational. For your safety, we strongly injury.
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the

334
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


_ Steering oil The steering gear oil level is too low. 왘 Have the system checked by an autho-
Visit workshop! There is a danger of steering gear dam- rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
age.

Warning! G
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is
too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

335
Practical hints
What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution


K Close You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the sliding/pop-up roof
sunroof! the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 214).
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
J Close You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the sliding/pop-up roof
sunroof! the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 214).
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
ì Function This display appears if button ì or
Not available í on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Ê Close trunk lid! This message will appear whenever the 왘 Close the trunk lid.
trunk lid is open.
W Washer fluid The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 289).
Check level total reservoir capacity.

336
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
왔 Where will I find...?
First aid kit Vehicle tool kit Removing the vehicle tool kit

The first aid kit is stored in left hand side of The vehicle tool kit is stored in the com-
the trunk. partment underneath the trunk floor.
The following is included:
앫 Towing eye bolt
앫 Alignment bolt
앫 Wheel wrench
앫 Vehicle jack
앫 Wheel bolts 1 Retaining screw
2 Storage well casing
왘 Lift trunk floor cover and engage trunk
왘 Loosen Velcro fastener.
floor handle in upper edge of trunk. 컄컄
왘 Remove first aid kit.

i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.

337
Practical hints
Where will I find...?

컄컄 ! i
To prevent damage, always disengage Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage
trunk floor handle from upper edge of well casing 5 must point in the direc-
trunk and lower trunk floor before clos- tion of travel. Otherwise you cannot
ing the trunk lid. place the storage well casing 2 on top
and secure the Minispare wheel with
왘 Loosen retaining screw 1 in the mid- retaining screw 1 (컄 page 337).
dle of storage well casing 2.
왘 Remove storage well casing 2.
3 Arrow
4 Minispare wheel
5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
6 Vehicle tool kit
Wheel wrench
Vehicle jack
Wheel bolts for Minispare wheel
왘 Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 5.

338
Practical hints
Where will I find...?

Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is stored in the space un-


derneath the trunk floor together with the
Warning! G vehicle tool kit in the vehicle tool kit stor-
age well casing.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from 왘 Turn the crank handle clockwise until it
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always engages (operational position).
firmly set parking brake and block wheels Before storing the vehicle jack in its com-
before raising vehicle with jack. partment:
왘 Remove the vehicle jack from its com-
Do not disengage parking brake while the partment. 앫 It should be fully collapsed
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
왘 Push the crank handle up. 앫 The handle must be folded in (storage
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
position)
on a level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
pacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.

339
Practical hints
Where will I find...?

Minispare wheel Removing the Minispare wheel Storing the Minispare wheel
왘 Lift trunk floor cover and engage trunk 왘 Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel
The Minispare wheel is located in the com-
floor handle in upper edge of trunk. well.
partment underneath the trunk floor.
왘 Loosen the retaining screw 왘 Place vehicle tool kit storage well
(컄 page 337) in the middle of storage casing 4 over the Minispare wheel.
well casing. Make sure the arrow 2 on storage
왘 Remove storage well casing well casing 4 points in the direction of
(컄 page 337). travel.
왘 Place storage well casing
왘 Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
(컄 page 337) over the vehicle tool kit
casing 4.
storage well casing 4 and turn the re-
왘 Remove Minispare wheel 3. taining screw (컄 page 337) clockwise
as far as it will go to secure the
1 Vehicle tool kit Minispare wheel.
Wheel wrench
Jack
Wheel bolts for Minispare wheel
2 Arrow
3 Minispare wheel
4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing

340
Practical hints
Where will I find...?

i In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo-


The arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage
Warning! G rarily use the Minispare wheel when ob-
well casing 4 must point in the direc- serving the following restrictions:
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
tion of travel, otherwise you cannot 앫 Do not excee